Kia 17sportage
User Manual: Kia 2017 KIA Sportage Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 595 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2016 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Audio system
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
9
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-7
1
Introduction
21
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections:This manual has 9 sections
plus an index. Each section begins
with a brief list of contents so you
can tell at a glance if that section has
the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were pre-
pared to enhance your personal safe-
ty.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommenda-
tions provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blend-
ed fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situa-
tion in which harm, serious bod-
ily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
13
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than
15% ethanol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 15%.
✽✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel sys-
tem or any performance problems
caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
✽✽ NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Introduction
41
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-
ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-
ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
✽✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any perform-
ance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol
or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives Such as
MMT(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not
recommend the use of gasoline con-
taining MMT. This type of fuel can
reduce vehicle performance and affect
your emission control system. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
15
Introduction
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance perform-
ance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of additive
should be added to the fuel tank at
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
every engine oil change is recom-
mended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Introduction
61
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correct-
ly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as con-
ventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in chapter 6 of
this manual.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
17
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood......................................................4-43
2. Head lamp (Features of your vehicle) ...4-119
Head lamp (Maintenance).....................8-81
3. Front fog lamp
(Features of your vehicle).....................4-124
Front fog lamp (Maintenance) ...............8-81
4. Wheel and tire................................8-47, 9-4
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-65
6. Panorama sunroof.................................4-48
7. Front windshield wiper blades
(Features of your vehicle)....................4-126
Front windshield wiper blades
(Maintenance) .......................................8-42
8. Windows................................................4-38
9. Parking assist system .........................4-113
OQL015001
■Front view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Door locks .............................................4-22
2. Fuel filler lid...........................................4-45
3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance) ..8-82
4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance)...8-82
5. Liftgate .........................................4-26, 4-28
6. Antenna...................................................5-2
7. Rearview camera ................................4-118
8. Parking assist system (Rear)...4-109, 4-113
OQL015002L
■Rear view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle...................................4-23
2. Power window switch...............................4-38
3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-24
4. Power window lock button.......................4-41
5. Outside rearview mirror control...............4-66
6. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-67
7. Instrument panel illumination control ......4-70
8. BSD On/Off button...................................6-73
9. LDWS On/Off button................................6-80
10. ESC off button .......................................6-44
11. Power liftgate open/close button ...........4-28
12. Steering wheel.......................................4-54
13. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever........................................................4-55
14. Inner fuse panel.....................................8-63
15. Brake pedal............................................6-28
16. Parking brake pedal...............................6-30
17. Hood release lever.................................4-43
18. Seat..........................................................3-4
OQLA015005
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Steering wheel audio controls...............5-2
2. Driver`s front air bag ...........................3-58
3. Horn.....................................................4-57
4. Instrument cluster................................4-69
5. Wiper and washer control lever.........4-126
6. Ignition switch........................................6-6
Engine start/stop button ........................6-9
7. Cruise control ......................................6-66
8. Audio .....................................................5-7
9. Hazard warning flasher .........................7-2
10. Manual climate control system........4-135
Automatic climate control system....4-145
11. Shift lever A/T....................................6-13
12. Seat warmer....................................4-166
Air ventilation seat...........................4-167
13. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-56
14. Smart phone wireless charger ........4-170
15. Drive mode button.............................6-70
16. AWD Lock button...............................6-20
17. DBC button........................................6-62
18. Electronic parking brake (EPB) switch..6-31
19. Auto Hold On/Off button....................6-38
20. Parking assist system On/Off button...4-113
21. Center console storage box ............4-162
22. USB charger....................................4-169
23. Power outlet.....................................4-168
24. Glove box ........................................4-162
25. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-58
OQL015004L
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OQLE075095/OQLA075109
■■THETA 2.4 GDI
❈The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■THETA 2.0 T-GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................8-31
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................8-29
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................8-34
4. Air cleaner.........................................8-37
5. Fuse box...........................................8-65
6. Negative battery terminal..................8-44
7. Positive battery terminal ...................8-44
8. Engine oil dipstick.............................8-28
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....8-35
Safety features of your vehicle
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
• Keep your vehicle in safe condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Children Always in the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . 3-33
• Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS). . . . . . . . 3-36
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• How does the air bag system operate? . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of
the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air
bags, ALWAYS make sure you and
your passengers wear your seat
belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain all children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers.
Safety should be the first concern
when behind the wheel and drivers
need to be aware of the wide array of
potential distractions, such as drowsi-
ness, reaching for objects, eating,
personal grooming, other passen-
gers, and using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile
devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones,
navigation units, etc.) when your
vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
33
Safety features of your vehicle
• ONLY use your mobile device
when allowed by laws and when
conditions permit safe use. NEVER
text or email while driving. Most
countries have laws prohibiting
drivers from texting. Some coun-
tries and cities also prohibit drivers
from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.
You have a responsibility to your
passengers and others on the road
to always drive safely, with your
hands on the wheel as well as your
eyes and attention on the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe con-
dition
Having a tire blowout or a mechani-
cal failure can be extremely haz-
ardous. To reduce the possibility of
such problems, check your tire pres-
sures and condition frequently, and
perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward /
backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support* (Driver`s seat)
(5) Headrest
Rear seat
(6) Seatback angle and folding
(7) Headrest
(8) Armrest
* : if equipped
SEAT
OQL035001
35
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
sengers to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
1KMN3662
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against the seatback could
result in serious or fatal injury
in a sudden stop or collision.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 250 mm (10 in)
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended. Failure
to do so can result in air bag
inflation injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack lug-
gage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
WARNING - Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any cir-
cumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of trans-
porting luggage or cargo.
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
OQLA035002
OQLA035003
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing up small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seats mechanism.
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat height
To change the height of the seat, push
the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
OQLA035004
WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
WARNING - Seating
Position
To reduce the risk of injury in a
crash, both drivers and passen-
gers should always sit as far
back as possible in the upright
position with the seatbelt prop-
erly secured.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
When in operation, the power seat-
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
system drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
OQLA035067
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
WARNING - Unattended
children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat height
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cush-
ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or press down
to lower the seat cushion. Release
the switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OQLA035008OQLA035007OQLA035006
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OQLA035009
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
OQLC035090
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
✽✽ NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and reinstallation
OQLA035010 OQLA035012
OQLA035013
■Type B
■Type A
OYFH034205
CAUTION
Excessive pulling or pushing
may damage the headrest.
313
Safety features of your vehicle
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1) or switch(1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
OQLA035014
OQLA035015
■Type B
■Type A
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's heads is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OQL035016
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
OQLC035087
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and reinstallation
(if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (1) while pulling the
headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height and ensure that it locks in
position.
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
OQLA035018 OQLA035096
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
WARNING
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seat-
back while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This is not a proper seating
position and no seat belts are
available for use. Ignoring this
warning could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
OQLA035021
OQL035020
317
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
4. Lift up the front portion of the seat-
back folding lever, then fold the
seat toward the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the seatback.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and push
the seatback rearward by lifting up
the front portion of the folding lever.
Push the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
OQL035030
OQLA035022
OQL035023 OQL035024
Safety features of your vehicle
183
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position.
CAUTION - Damaging
rear seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seat-
back, insert the buckle between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is secure-
ly applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehi-
cle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision.
WARNING - Rear
Seatback
When returning the rear seat to
the upright position:
• Be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle.
• Ensure the seatback is com-
pletely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
Failure to adhere to any of
these instructions could
result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can-
not protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
would either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
Seat belt warning
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate to the follow-
ing table when the ignition switch is
in “ON” position.
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
1GQA2083
321
Safety features of your vehicle
*1Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*2The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle
Speed Light-
Blink Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 5km/h
(3mph) 6 seconds None
5km/h (3mph) ~
10km/h (6mph) 6 seconds
Above 10km/h
(6mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 10km/h
(6mph) →Below
5km/h (3mph)
6 seconds *1
↓
Stop *2
B180A01NF-1
B200A02NF
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of the 4 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Rear center seatbelt
To fasten your seatbelt:
1. Extract the tongue plate (A) from
the hole on the belt assembly
cover.
OQL035031
Front seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
OQLE035071
323
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
buckle (A’) until an audible “click"
is heard, indicating the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not
twisted.
3. Pull out the tongue plate (B) from
the pocket (C). 4. Pull the tongue plate (B) and
insert it into the buckle (B’) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
OQL035072 OQLE035027OQL035073
Safety features of your vehicle
243
✽✽NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
safety belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
To release your seatbelt:
1. Press the release button on the
buckle (B’) and remove the tongue
plate (B).
2. Insert the tongue plate (B) into the
pocket (C)
3. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate into the
web release hole (A'). Pull up on
the seat belt web and allow the
webbing to retract automatically.
OQL035027
OQL035074
OQL035028
325
Safety features of your vehicle
4. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
hole on the belt assembly cover.
Stowing the rear seat belt
• The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when
not in use.
• The center seat belt can be stowed
with the plate and webbing rolled in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion.
• Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides
will help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
OQL035071 OQL035030
OQL035029
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor may
lock into position.In certain frontal col-
lisions, the pre-tensioner will activate
and pull the seat belt into tighter con-
tact against the occupant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD
(Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt. (if equipped)
✽✽NOTICE - without rollover
sensor
The pre-tensioner will activate not
only in a frontal collision but also in a
side collision, if the vehicle is equipped
with a side or curtain air bag.
CAUTION
Take the seatbelt out of the seat-
belt guide prior to using it. If you
pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may
damage the guides and/or the
belt webbing.
OXMA033101
327
Safety features of your vehicle
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Front retractor pre-tensioner
assembly
(3) SRS control module
(4) Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
✽✽NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem may be activated not only in
certain frontal collision, but also in
certain side collisions or rollovers.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
WARNING - Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
ODMESA2024
Safety features of your vehicle
283
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
is not working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is not
a malfunction with the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illu-
minates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt
and SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Hot preten-
sioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pre-
tensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use of
these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
✽✽NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that meets
the Safety Standards of your country.
Before buying any child restraint sys-
tem, make sure that it has a label cer-
tifying that it meets the Safety
Standards of your country. The
restraint must be appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint
for this information. Refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips as low as possi-
ble. Check periodically to insure that
the belt fits. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the
front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should
be placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident.This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children Always in the Rear Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat. Even
with air bags, children can be serious-
ly injured or killed. Children too large
for a child restraint must use the seat
belts provided.
Most countries have child restraint
laws which require children to travel
in approved child restraint devices.
The laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among coun-
tries, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your coun-
try, and where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
WARNING - Restraint
Location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forceful-
ly struck by an inflating airbag
and seriously injured.
WARNING - Hot Child
Restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
ing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets the Safety
Standards of your country.
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this infor-
mation.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
WARNING
- Child Restraint Installation
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of serious injury or death in an
accident. Always take the fol-
lowing precautions when using
a child restraint system:
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a Kia
dealer check the child restraint
system, seat belts, tether
anchors and lower anchors.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
WARNING - Holding
Children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle.The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat Belt Use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The
harness system holds the child in
place, and in an accident, acts to
keep the child positioned in the seat
and reduces the stress to the neck
and spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant
child restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats
typically have higher height and
weight limits for the rear-facing posi-
tion, allowing you to keep your child
rear-facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufactur-
er. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness. Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the for-
ward-facing child restraint, your child
is ready for a booster seat.
CRS09 OQLA035032
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat
until they are big enough to sit in the
seat without a booster and still have
the seat belt fit properly. For a seat
belt to fit properly, the lap belt must
lie snugly across the upper thighs,
not the stomach. The shoulder belt
should lie snug across the shoulder
and chest and not across the neck or
face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and
must always be properly restrained
to minimize the risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
•Properly secure the child
restraint to the vehicle. All child
restraints must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt or with the
LATCH system.
•Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
•Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufac-
turer instructions.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an
accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attach-
ments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will pro-
vide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attach-
ments for the LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are
no LATCH anchors provided for the
center rear seating position.
OQLC035035
WARNING - LATCH Lower
Anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center
seating position. LATCH lower
anchors are only to be used in
the left and right rear outboard
seating positions.You may dam-
age the anchors or the anchors
may fail and break in a collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.
❈(1) : Lower Anchor position indicator
(2) : Lower Anchor
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the lower
anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the
vehicle seat, then attach the seat
to the lower anchors according to
the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instruc-
tions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower
anchors.
OQL035036
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized Kia dealer after an acci-
dent. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may
not properly secure the child
restraint.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufactur-
er recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint system top tether
anchorages are located on the back
of the rear seatbacks.
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether
strap over the child restraint seat-
back. Route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts, or route
the tether strap over the top of the
vehicle seatback. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the tether anchor, then tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions to
firmly secure the child restraint to
the seat.
OQLA035033
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the cor-
rect tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harness-
es, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
• Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure
to do so may result in child
strangulation.
OQLA035034
Safety features of your vehicle
403
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat for-
ward and from side-to-side.
Securing a child restraint with a
lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system.To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1.Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/ shoul-
der belt around or through the child
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
OLMB033044
341
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct "click" sound.
Position the release button so that
it is easy to access in case of an
emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratchet-
ing" sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
OEN036101 OEN036102 OEN036103
Safety features of your vehicle
423
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
✽✽NOTICE
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
343
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OQLA035085
Safety features of your vehicle
443
How does the air bag system
operate?
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• In normal conditions, the airbag is
designed to deploy based on cer-
tain angle and intensity of the colli-
sion. These two factors are crucial
elements for deciding whether to
transmit airbag deployment signal
or start the electrical operation or
not.
• The airbag will deploy based on
angle and intensity of the collision.
It will not deploy in every crash or
collision situations
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected curtain
air bags will remain inflated longer
to help provide protection from
ejection, especially when used in
conjunction with the seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-
stantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discom-
fort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING - Airbag infla-
tion
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 25 cm (10 in) from
your chest to the steering wheel
is recommended. Failure to do
so can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat. If the front passenger air
bag inflates, it could cause serious or
fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
1JBH3051
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Roll over sensor*
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10.Side pressure sensors
11. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
12. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
13. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
14. Emergency Fastening
Device(EFD)
*: if equipped If the air bag warning light is illumi-
nated for more than 6 seconds after
the ignition is turned on, or of it illu-
minates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be func-
tioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
W7-147
OQLA035099
Safety features of your vehicle
483
If any of the following conditions
occur, this indicates a malfunction in
the air bag system. Have an author-
ized Kia dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position. The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
349
Safety features of your vehicle
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These con-
ditions are normal and are not haz-
ardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some per-
sons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with cold
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags were
deployed.
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehi-
cle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illuminat-
ing for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly. If
this occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the ignition switch.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illumi-
nate.
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag indicator.
OQLA035101
■Type A
■Type B OQLA035060
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of the occu-
pant detection system
• An detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicates the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the
floor, and wearing the safety belt prop-
erly) for the most effective protection
by the air bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*1The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has
outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult*1Off Off Activated
2. Child restraint system with
child under 12 months old
*2*3*4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
CAUTION
• Do not install a child restraint
seat in the passenger seat
when the seat is heavily
soaked with any type of liquid.
• Do not alter or remodel the
ODS (Occupant Detection
System).This may damage the
system and prevent it from
functioning properly in a colli-
sion.
353
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not use car seat cushions that
cover up the surface of the seat
and aftermarket manufactured
passenger seat heaters.
• After conducting car interior
cleaning using steam or detergent,
the seat should be dried properly.
Afterward, check for normal
operation of the “PASS AIR BAG
“OFF”” and air bag warning
lights.
• Any service related to the passen-
ger seat and the ODS must be
done at Kia service center.
• After the passenger seat has been
removed or installed for repair
purposes, check for normal opera-
tion of the “PASS AIR BAG
“OFF”” and air bag warning
lights with a person seated or not
seated in the passenger seat.
✽✽NOTICE
When the “PASS AIR BAG “OFF””
symbol is illuminated, the passenger
air bag system will not operate. The
passenger air bag system will oper-
ate when necessary if the symbol is
not illuminated.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
WARNING
When the passenger is not sit-
ting properly in the passenger
seat, or some items are placed
on or under the passenger seat,
it may interfere with normal
operation of the ODS (Occupant
Detection System). In order for
the driver and all passengers to
receive maximum benefit from
the airbag and seat belt system,
all persons should seat and
wear the seat belt properly.
Safety features of your vehicle
543
WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
- Do not place a heavy loads in
the front passenger seatback
pocket or on the front passen-
ger seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
(Continued)
OJFA035104
OJFA035105 OJFA035107
OJFA035106 OJFA035108
355
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
- Do not use car seat acces-
sories such as thick blankets
and cushions which cover up
the car seat surface.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market DMB, navigation,
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
OQLA035100 OJFA035109 OJFA035102
Safety features of your vehicle
563
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
(Continued)
- Wet Passenger Seat:
Do not spill liquid in the pas-
senger seat. Spilled liquid on
the passenger seat may cause
the air bag warning light to illu-
minate or malfunction. If any
liquid is spilled, make sure the
seat has been completely dried
before driving the vehicle.
OJFA035103 B990A01O
Proper position
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a crash.
The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself
in the seat. Failure to properly
position yourself may lead to air
bag deactivation resulting in air
bag non-deployment in a colli-
sion. If the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator remains
illuminated after the passenger
repositions themselves proper-
ly and the car is restarted, it is
recommended that passenger
move to the rear seat because
the passenger's front air bag
will not deploy.
357
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
• Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant detection system,
never install a child restraint system
in the front passenger's seat. A
deploying air bag can forcefully strike
a child resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and under
should ride in the rear seat. Children
too large for child restraints should
use the available lap/shoulder belts.
No matter what type of crash, chil-
dren of all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated when the
front passenger's seat is occupied
by an adult and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), have that person
sit in the rear seat.
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No matter what
type of crash, children of all ages are
safer when restrained in the rear seat.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate because the passen-
ger's front air bag is connected with
the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-
minate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crash-
es even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
OQL035039
■Driver’s front air bag
■Passenger’s front air bag OQL035038
Safety features of your vehicle
583
The indication of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG" locat-
ed on the air bag pad cover on the
steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel pad above the glove
box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low severity collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat.The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
Modification to the seat structure can
cause the air bag to deploy at a dif-
ferent level than should be provided.
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
359
Safety features of your vehicle
Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes.
✽✽NOTICE
Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized Kia dealer
replace the air bag immediately
after deployment.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. However, when
frontal deployment threshold is satis-
fied at side-impact, front air bags
may deploy. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment threshold.
WARNING - Replacement /
modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an author-
ized Kia dealer using original
Kia parts designed for this vehi-
cle and model. Any other such
replacement or modification
could adversely affect the oper-
ation of the occupant detection
system and your advanced air
bags.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stick-
ers) should be placed over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box. Such
objects could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to deploy.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deploy-
ment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
Safety features of your vehicle
603
Side air bag
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity impact. However, when
side deployment threshold is satis-
fied at front-impact, side air bags
may deploy.
• The side air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a sub-
stitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
OQL035041
OQL035061
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
air bag.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-
cle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
Curtain air bag
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
OQLA035042
OQLA035043
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deploy-
ment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity impact. However, when
side deployment threshold is satis-
fied at front-impact, curtain air bags
may deploy.
• The curtain air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies against the
doors, put their arms on the doors,
stretch their arms out of the window
or place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are seat-
ed on seats equipped with side
impact and/or curtain air bags.
✽✽NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the coat hook.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional pro-
tection.
These include rear impacts, second
or third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (Front Door)
(4) Side impact sensor (C-pillar)
(5) Side impact sensor (B-pillar)
❈The actual air bag collision sensors in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OQLA035044/OQL035045/OQL035046/OQL035047/OQL035048/OQLA035059
Safety features of your vehicle
643
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors where side collision sen-
sors are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing a
bumper (or front door module) with
non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the impact of the front collision.
OQLA035049
WARNING - Air bag sen-
sors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
365
Safety features of your vehicle
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the impact resulting
from a side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions.They may inflate in other types
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indi-
cate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, includ-
ing when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed.
Even where side and/or curtain air
bags would not provide impact pro-
tection in a rollover, however, they
will deploy to prevent ejection of
occupants, especially those who are
restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OQLA035050
OQL035041
Safety features of your vehicle
663
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
OQL035054OQLA035053
OQLA035052
367
Safety features of your vehicle
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
1VQA2089 OQL035055 OQL035083
Safety features of your vehicle
683
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as util-
ity poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area
and the full force of the impact is not
delivered to the sensors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on, have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to fol-
low these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
OQL035056
369
Safety features of your vehicle
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the opera-
tion of your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risks of the air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OQLA035057
OQLA035058
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-23
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Opening the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Smart Power Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Electronic power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Trip modes (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• LDWS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109
• Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Operation of the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Non-operational conditions of parking assist system. . 4-115
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• High Beam Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-125
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Liftgate room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Two types of luggage board use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Air ventilation seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Wireless smart phone charging system . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
4
45
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe place,
but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
FOLDING KEY
OJF045002
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING - Aftermarket
key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will contin-
ue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possi-
ble fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
Features of your vehicle
64
Door Lock (1)
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽✽NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
OXMA043317
47
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate unlock (3)
The liftgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
For detailed information refer to the
"Power liftgate" in this chapter.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warn-
ing lights flash for about 27 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
0.5 second. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the trans-
mitter.
Transmitter precautions
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating dis-
tance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sub-
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
Features of your vehicle
84
• When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proxim-
ity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmit-
ter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.
✽✽NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned correctly.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OYDDCO2005
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
49
Features of your vehicle
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be
harmful to the environment
and may cause harm to
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
verifies if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Features of your vehicle
104
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys anywhere
in your vehicle.Your Immobilizer pass-
word is a customer unique password
and should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere in
your vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
✽✽NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
411
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽✽NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator ( ) goes off after blink-
ing 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only avail-
able from an authorized Kia dealer-
ship. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
( ) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
3. To enter the first digit (in this exam-
ple “2”), turn the ignition switch to
the ON and ACC position twice.
Perform the same procedure for
the next digits between 3 seconds
and 10 seconds (for example, for
“3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC
3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home pro-
cedure, you have to see an author-
ized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
Features of your vehicle
124
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an author-
ized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
SMART KEY
OUM045428MX
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
413
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the liftgate is
open.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
OYDDCO2004
OQL045001
Features of your vehicle
144
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the lift-
gate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7~1m (28~40in.) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Liftgate unlocking
Using the liftgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the liftgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will lock
automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the liftgate handle.
415
Features of your vehicle
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the liftgate unlock button (3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
For detailed information refer to the
"Power liftgate" in this chapter.
Panic
1. Press the panic button (4) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 27
seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in chapter 6.
Features of your vehicle
164
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-
cle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
a call, receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the smart key
and your cell phone or smart phone
in the same pants or jacket pocket
and maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
✽✽NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
417
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is in the correct position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
OUM045427MX
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Features of your vehicle
184
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it verifies if the smart key is valid
or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
✽✽NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽✽NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽✽NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
419
Features of your vehicle
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and lift-
gate) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmit-
ter of the keyless entry system (or
smart key) or ignition key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also
sounds) once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or liftgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime will not
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors and liftgate and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warn-
ing lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by
locking the doors with the key from
the front doors; however, the hazard
warning lights will not blink using this
method.
✽✽NOTICE
The theft-alarm system can be deac-
tivated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
204
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or liftgate
) or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the sys-
tem is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the ignition key or trans-
mitter (or smart key).
• The liftgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds, and
repeat the horn 3 times unless the
system is disarmed. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the igni-
tion key or transmitter (or smart key).
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when
• The doors (and liftgate) are
unlocked with the transmitter (or
smart key) or the ignition key.
After depressing the unlock button,
the hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice (in
smart key) to indicate that the sys-
tem is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if
any door (or liftgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
421
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key
into the ignition switch, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position
and wait for 30 seconds. Then the
system will be disarmed.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, press the engine
start/stop button with smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system are
not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer warranty.
CAUTION - Adjusting
alarm system
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
224
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
To remove the cover (For Type C):
1. Pull out the door handle.
2. Press the lever (1) located inside
the bottom part of the cover with a
key or flat-head screwdriver.
3. Push out the cover while pressing
the lever.
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock automatically.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
DOOR LOCKS
OQLE045066
OQL045002
■Type A ■Type B
■Type C
423
Features of your vehicle
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position when the igni-
tion switch is in the OFF position
and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows, and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark on the door lock button will
not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(2) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and an
door is open.
OQL045004
OQL045003
Features of your vehicle
244
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the right portion(1)
for driver side or the upper por-
tion(1) for passenger side of the
switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• When pressing the left portion(2)
for driver side or the lower por-
tion(2) for passenger side of the
switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the right
portion(1) for driver side or upper
portion(1) for passenger side of the
central door lock switch is pressed.
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
WARNING - Unattended
children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
OQL045005
OQLA045511
■Driver side
■Passenger side
425
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock
system
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h
(10 mph).
✽✽NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings”.
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Turn the child safety lock (1) locat-
ed on the rear edge of the door to
the lock ( ) position. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open
even when the inner door handle
is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OQL045006
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is moving, they may fall
out.
Features of your vehicle
264
Opening the liftgate
• The liftgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the
liftgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate is locked auto-
matically.
The liftgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the liftgate.
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the liftgate
To close the liftgate, lower and push
down the liftgate firmly. Make sure
that the liftgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the liftgate.
LIFTGATE (for manual liftgate)
OQL045007 OQL045008
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
427
Features of your vehicle
Emergency liftgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the lift-
gate. When someone is inadvertent-
ly locked in the cargo area, the lift-
gate can be opened by pushing the
release lever and pushing open the
liftgate.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the liftgate open is
not advisable. Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the liftgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that addi-
tional outside air can enter.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OQL045009 CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
liftgate latch and striker while
closing the liftgate. It may dam-
age the liftgate's latch.
Features of your vehicle
284
(1) Power liftgate open / close button
(2) Power liftgate handle switch
(3) Power liftgate close button
✽✽NOTICE
If IGN is ON, the power liftgate
operates when :
• Automatic shift lever is in P
(Park).
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power lift-
gate may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not attach heavy objects to the
power liftgate when you operate the
power liftgate additional. Weight on
liftgate could cause damages to the
system.
POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Unattended
children/pets
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power liftgate in such a
way that could result in injury to
themselves or others or dam-
age to the vehicle.
OQL045010L
OQL045011L
OQL045012L
429
Features of your vehicle
Opening the liftgate
The power liftgate will open automat-
ically by doing one of the following:
• Press and hold the liftgate unlock
button on the transmitter or smart
key until power liftgate operates.
• While power liftgate operating, you
can stop it if you shortly press the
unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key.
• Press the power liftgate open/close
button for approximately one sec-
ond.
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
liftgate manually during auto-
matic operation.This may cause
damage to the power liftgate or
to the vehicle.
If it is necessary to close or
open the power liftgate manual-
ly when the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected, make
sure the liftgate is not in opera-
tion. Switch the power liftgate to
the off position. Do not apply
excessive force.
OQLA045512
OQL045010
Features of your vehicle
304
• Press the liftgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
Closing the liftgate
• Press the power liftgate close but-
ton for approximately one second
when the liftgate is opened.
The liftgate will close and lock
automatically.
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
Power liftgate non-opening condi-
tions
The power liftgate will not open auto-
matically, when the vehicle is moving
more than 3km/h (2mph) or the auto-
matic shift lever is not in P(Park) posi-
tion.
✽✽NOTICE
The chime will sound continuously if
you drive over 3km/h (2mph) with the
liftgate opened. Stop your vehicle at a
safe place as soon as possible to check
if your liftgate is opened.
OQL045011 OQL045010
OQLA045512
431
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• The power liftgate can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power liftgate opera-
tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
liftgate in the open position for a
long time.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate by yourself.
This must be done by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power liftgate.
This could cause the power liftgate
to operate improperly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In cold and wet climates, the
power liftgate may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
• It is recommended to wait until
the power liftgate is fully closed
before starting the vehicle. The
power liftgate may not close fully
if the vehicle is started during
automatic closing.
CAUTION
Do not operate the power lift-
gate more than 5 times continu-
ously.
It may damage the power liftgate
system. If you operate the power
liftgate more than 5 times con-
tinuously, the chime will sound 3
times and the power liftgate will
not operate. At this time, stop
operating the liftgate and leave it
for more than 1 minute.
Features of your vehicle
324
Automatic reversal
During power opening and closing if
the power liftgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
liftgate will detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected while
opening the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected while
closing the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the liftgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and
reversal may not detect the resist-
ance.
If the automatic reversal feature
operates continuously more than
twice during opening or closing oper-
ation, the power liftgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
liftgate manually and operate the lift-
gate automatically again.
How to reset the power liftgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power liftgate to operate normally,
reset the power liftgate as follows:
1. Put the automatic shift lever in P
(Park).
2. While pressing the liftgate close
button, press the liftgate handle
switch for more than 3 seconds.
(the chime will sound)
3. Close the liftgate manually.
If the power liftgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQL045013
WARNING
Never place any object or part of
your body in the path of the
power liftgate as it is operating.
Doing so could result in personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.
Never operate power liftgate
attached with any heavy objects
(ex. Bicycles). It could damage
the power liftgate.
433
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
If the power liftgate does not operate
normally, first check the following
condition before using the power
liftgate.
Make sure the automatic shift lever
is in P (Park).
Power liftgate opening height
user setting
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened liftgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Position the liftgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the liftgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the liftgate manually after
hearing the buzzer sound.
The liftgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
Smart Power Liftgate
(if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the liftgate can be opened using
the Smart Power Liftgate system.
OQL045012 OQL045016
Features of your vehicle
344
How to use the Smart Power
Liftgate
The liftgate can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate does
not operate when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is contin-
uously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within 1.5
m (60 inches) from the front door
handles. (for vehicles equipped
with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Power Liftgate,
go to User Settings Mode and select
Smart Power Liftgate on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (50 ~100 cm (20~40 inches)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the liftgate
will open.
OQL045017
435
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the liftgate to
open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The liftgate
will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the liftgate will open.
Make sure you close the liftgate
before driving your vehicle.
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the liftgate before
opening or closing the liftgate. Make
sure objects in the liftgate do not
come out when opening the liftgate
on a slope. It may cause serious
injury. Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Power Liftgate when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the liftgate
may open inadvertently. The key
should be kept out of reach of chil-
dren. Children may inadvertently
open the Smart Power Liftgate while
playing around the rear area of the
vehicle.
OQLA045018
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
Features of your vehicle
364
How to deactivate the Smart
Power Liftgate function using the
smart key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Liftgate open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Power Liftgate func-
tion will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Power Liftgate
function for emergency situations.
✽✽NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton (2), the Smart Power Liftgate
function will be deactivated tem-
porarily. But, if you do not open
any door for 30 seconds, the smart
power liftgate function will be
activated again.
• If you press the liftgate open but-
ton (3) for more than 1 second, the
liftgate opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or liftgate open button (3) when
the Smart Power Liftgate function
is not in the Detect and Alert stage,
the smart power liftgate function
will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Power Liftgate function by
pressing the smart key button and
opened a door, the smart power
liftgate function can be activated
again by closing and locking all
doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Power Liftgate operates
with a welcome alert if the smart
key is detected within 50~100 cm
(20~40 inches) from the liftgate.
• The alert stops once the smart key
is positioned outside the detecting
area during the Detect and Alert
stage.
OXM043001
OQL045063C
437
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate function
will not work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope
or unpaved road, etc.
Features of your vehicle
384
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down (Driver's window)
(7) Power window lock button
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OQL045072C
■■Front
■■Rear
439
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the oper-
ation of rear seat windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
If the front doors are opened; howev-
er, the power windows cannot be
operated even within the 30 second
period.
✽✽NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately 2.5 cm. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OQL045022
Features of your vehicle
404
Auto up/down window
(Driver's window)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the win-
dow is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver's and passenger's
window and continue pulling up
the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the win-
dow is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
(for Auto up/down window)
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
OQL045021
OUN026013
441
Features of your vehicle
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear seat
doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock button located on the dri-
ver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
•When the power window lock
button is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle dam-
age. If an object less than 4 mm
(0.16 in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and
will not stop and reverse direc-
tion. OQL045023
Features of your vehicle
424
- The rear passenger's control can
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
CAUTION - Opening /clos-
ing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power win-
dows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock button
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
443
Features of your vehicle
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
and setting the parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch (1) upward inside of the
hood center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood.
4. Pull out the stay rod.
5. Hold the hood opened with the
stay rod (1).
HOOD
OQL045024
OQL045025 OQL045047
WARNING - Stay Rod
• To prevent from being burned
by hot metal, grab the stay rod
in the area wrapped in rubber.
• Ensure the stay rod is com-
pletely inserted into the hole
provided whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This
will prevent the hood from
falling and possibly injuring
you.
Features of your vehicle
444
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place. WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
CAUTION - Hood obstruc-
tion
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
445
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
1. To open the fuel filler lid, press the
3 o`clock position edge of the fuel
filler lid.
✽✽NOTICE
The fuel filler lid will open and close
only when all doors are unlocked.
2. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
3. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
4. Place the cap on the fuel filler lid.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽✽NOTICE
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normal-
ly with the OBD system.
✽✽NOTICE
When refueling on unlevel ground,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
FUEL FILLER LID
OQL045027
OQL045046
Features of your vehicle
464
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽✽NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator light will illuminate.
WARNING - Fire/explo-
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or
fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,
etc.) capable of producing stat-
ic electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in rapid burn-
ing. If you must reenter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source.
WARNING - Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap. If
pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
447
Features of your vehicle
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place
the container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity dis-
charge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, con-
tact with the vehicle should be
maintained until the filling is com-
plete. Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
Features of your vehicle
484
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo.This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
OQL045028
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
449
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or the
warning indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 1st detent position.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehi-
cle. If the sunroof is opened, rain
or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
OQL045106 OQL045029
Features of your vehicle
504
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the 1st detent position.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽✽NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 2nd detent position, both
the sunshade and sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, push
the sunroof control glass lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof glass control lever
backward to the 1st or 2nd detent
position, the sunroof glass will be
opened.
To stop the sunroof glass movement
at any point, push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
CAUTION - Automatic
sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driv-
ing in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
OQL045030
451
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direc-
tion, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
✽✽NOTICE
If you drive with the sunroof opened
right after a vehicle wash or rain,
water may get inside the vehicle.
OXM049029
WARNING - Sunroof
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
WARNING - Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
Features of your vehicle
524
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever upward,
the sunshade will slide halfway open
then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the 2nd detent position. The
sunroof glass and sunshade will
close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the 1st detent position. The
sunroof glass will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Start the engine.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close until
the sunshade slightly moves.Then,
release the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→Glass Slide Open →Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
Then, release the lever.
OQL045031
453
Features of your vehicle
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset and one
touch open and close should be
restored.
✽✽NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
544
Electronic power steering
(EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Electronic power steering is con-
trolled by a power steering control
unit which senses the steering wheel
torque and vehicle speed to com-
mand the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as the
vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steer-
ing control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the Electronic Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster.The steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, the steer-
ing effort may be high or abnormal
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will likely disappear.
This is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, and
the steering wheel is turned all the
way to the left or right continuous-
ly, the steering wheel becomes
harder to turn. The power assist is
limited to protect the motor from
overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
✽✽NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electronic Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
455
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the charging system warning
light comes on due to the low volt-
age (When the alternator or bat-
tery) does not operate normally or
malfunctions), the steering wheel
may require increased steering
effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
OQL045032
Features of your vehicle
564
✽✽NOTICE
After adjustment, sometimes the
lock release lever may not lock the
steering wheel. It is not a malfunc-
tion. This occurs when two gears are
not engaged correctly. In this case,
adjust the steering wheel again and
then lock the steering wheel.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
✽✽NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
WARNING
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
OQL045033
457
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
CAUTION
• Do not install any type of grip
cover for the steering wheel, it
may impair the function of the
heated steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
OQL045034
Features of your vehicle
584
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear win-
dow.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever (3) is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever (3) toward
you to reduce the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
during night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
❈(1) : Day, (2) : Night
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
ment
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag. OQL045035
459
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
(2) will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
(2) will illuminate.
❈(2) : Indicator, (3) : Sensor
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OQL045059
Features of your vehicle
604
Electrochromic mirror with
HomeLink system (if equipped)
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
HomeLink®Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an
integrated HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to pro-
gram the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-
gested that upon the sale of the vehi-
cle, the programmed HomeLink but-
tons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
OQLA045068
OQLA045069
Glare detection
sensor
Indicator light
Homelink buttons
461
Features of your vehicle
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC posi-
tion for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror: 1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons ( ,)
simultaneously until the indicator
light begins to flash after approxi-
mately 20 seconds. (This proce-
dure erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step
when programming the additional
HomeLink buttons.)
✽✽NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage door opener is
non-rolling code or rolling code,
please refer to the garage door open-
ers owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1-
800-355-3515.
OQLA045070
Flashing
Features of your vehicle
624
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to
train and the button on the trans-
mitter while the transmitter is
approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inch-
es) away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3
has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
✽✽NOTICE
Some gate and garage door openers
may require you to replace step #3
with the “cycling” procedure noted
in the “Canadian Programming”
section of this document.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the “Programming” portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, refer-
ence the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 sec-
onds to complete step number 6.
OQLA045071
2-8cm
2-8cm
Flashing
463
Features of your vehicle
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now rec-
ognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink but-
ton is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the
programmed HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, securi-
ty system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
To erase the three programmed but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time.
OQLA045070
Flashing
Features of your vehicle
644
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from
the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in “Canadian
Programming”).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been pro-
grammed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
Canadian Programming
Garage & gate openers
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the
“Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Accessories
If you would like additional informa-
tion on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compati-
ble products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
465
Features of your vehicle
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the
mirror, do not force the mirror
for adjustment. To remove ice,
use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm
water.
Features of your vehicle
664
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
(if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror, press the R or L
button (1) to select the right side mir-
ror or the left side mirror, then press a
corresponding point ( ) on the mir-
ror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the button into
neutral(center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
OQLE045038
467
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch when the ignition switch is
ACC or ON position as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automat-
ically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the folding key or smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
OQLA045040
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the engine start/stop
button is in the OFF position.
However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is
not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
Features of your vehicle
684
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
OQL045039
469
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights
OQL045191C/OQL045193C
■■Type A
❈The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■■Type B
Features of your vehicle
704
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
(“+” or “-”) when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
taillights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button (“+” or “-”), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for change the
LCD MODES
(2) / : MOVE scroll switch for
select the items
(3) OK : SET/RESET button for set
the items or reset the items
❈For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OQL045041
OQLA045061
OQLE045233
471
Features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (mph).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the "H"
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 7.
OQL045184C
OQL045183
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OQLE045230
Features of your vehicle
724
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽✽NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 9.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
✽✽NOTICE - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose vehi-
cle occupants to danger. You must
top and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the “E
(Empty)” level.
✽✽NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
WARNING - Hot radiator
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pres-
sure and could cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is
cool before adding coolant to
the reservoir.
OQLE045232
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
473
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 1,599,999 km
or 999,999 miles.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 85°C
(-40°F ~ 185°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being distracted.
To change the temperature unit (from
°F to °C or from °C to °F) :
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the "User
Settings" mode of the LCD display.
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OQL045108 OQL045109
Features of your vehicle
744
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
OJF045138
475
Features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
❈For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
LCD Modes
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Tur n By Turn
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
LDWS
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” in chapter 6.
A/V
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Service
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and pressure status of each tire.
This mode informs of warning messages related to Low tire pressure or malfunction of
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Features of your vehicle
764
Edit, settings after engaging park-
ing brake / Edit, settings after
shifting to P
This warning message illuminates if
you try to select an item from the
User Settings mode while driving.
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and mov-
ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Service Mode
Tire Pressure (if equipped)
This mode displays the pressure sta-
tus of each tire.
You can change the tire pressure unit
in "User settings" mode.
❈For more information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
Service Interval
Service interval
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reach-
es 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days,
“Service in” message is displayed for
several seconds each time you set
the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
OQLE045116
OQLE045195
OQLE045117
477
Features of your vehicle
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, the “Service
required” message will appear.
The “Service required” message is
displayed for several seconds each
time you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted
before:
Press the OK button (reset) for more
than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set
“Service in OFF” message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
If you want to activate Service inter-
val function, set the service interval
in the User setting mode.
For more details, refer to “User set-
ting mode" in this chapter.
✽✽NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OQLE045196 OQLE045197
Features of your vehicle
784
Master Warning Mode
• This warning light informs the driv-
er the following situations
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
User Settings Mode
Description
In this mode, you can change setting
of the doors, lights, etc.
OQLE045118
WARNING
Do not adjust the User Setting
while driving.You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
479
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
AEB (Autonomous
Emergency Braking)
(if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
For more details, refer to “Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)” in chapter 6.
FCW
(Forward Collision Warning)
(if equipped)
Choose the sensitivity of the FCW.
For more details, refer to “Autonomous Emergency Braking(AEB)” in chapter 6.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
804
Items Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Disable : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
15km/h (9.3mph).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
Automatically Unlock
• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the
ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
(If equipped) If this item is checked, the two press unlock will be activated.
Power Liftgate
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the power liftgate function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Liftgate” in this chapter.
Smart Liftgate
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the smart liftgate function will be activated.
If the power liftgate function is not activated, you cannot activate this function.
For more details, refer to “Liftgate” in this chapter.
Door/Liftgate
481
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more details, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay • If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated.
Welcome Light
(If equipped) • If this item is checked, the welcome light function will be activated.
Light
Items Explanation
Park Assist System Vol.
(if equipped)
• Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
For more details, refer to “Parking Assist System” in this chapter.
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
Sound (if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
Welcome Sound
(if equipped) • If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.
Sound
Features of your vehicle
824
Items Explanation
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
For more details, refer to “Service Mode” in this chapter.
Service interval
Convenience
Items Explanation
Steering Position If this item is checked, the warning function regarding the steering wheel alignment will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Warning Messages” in this chapter.
Wiper/Light Display
(if equipped) If this item is checked, the LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you
changed its mode.
Auto rear wiper (reverse)
(if equipped) If this item is checked, the rear wiper will automatically activated when the front wiper is in ON
position and shift lever is in R (reverse) position.
Wireless smart phone
charging system (if equipped) If this item checked, the Wireless smart phone charging system will be activated.
483
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset If this item is checked, the average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling or after
ignition.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit
(if equipped) Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)
Other features
Features of your vehicle
844
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 km. or
1 ~ 9,999 mi
• If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function may
not operate correctly.
TRIP MODES (TRIP COMPUTER)
Digital speedometer
To change the trip mode, scroll the
TRIP scroll switch ( / ) in the trip
computer mode.
• Tripmeter
• Average Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
TRIP A
• Tripmeter
• Average Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
OQL045251C
485
Features of your vehicle
• The range may differ from the actu-
al driving distance as it is an esti-
mate of the available driving dis-
tance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range : 1 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To reset average fuel economy manu-
ally, press the OK button (reset) on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel econ-
omy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
reset automatically whenever refuel-
ing, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
• OFF - You may set to default manu-
ally by using the trip switch reset but-
ton.
• When driving - The vehicle will auto-
matically set to default once 4 hours
pass after the Ignition is in OFF.
• When refueling - After refueling
more than 6 liters and driving over
1km/h, the vehicle will reset to
default automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Features of your vehicle
864
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 30 L/100km
~ 0 ~ 50 MPG or 0
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
To reset the tripmeter, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range : 0~240 km/h or
0~160 MPH
To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK button (reset) on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average vehicle speed
is displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
OQL045141C
487
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time(3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
To reset elapsed time, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
Digital speedometer
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
One time driving information
mode
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the range (3) will display
as "---".
When low fuel warning light ( ) illu-
minates in the cluster, the refuel
message will appear(4).
OQLE045143
OQL045144C
Features of your vehicle
884
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
LDWS Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS).
For more information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)”
in chapter 6.
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OQLA055168 OJF045142LOQLE045200
489
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to P position
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turn-
ing the steering wheel right and left.
OQLE045124
OQLE045121 OQLE045202
Features of your vehicle
904
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Check steering wheel lock sys-
tem (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
OQLE045203 OQLE045204 OQLE045126
491
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OQLE045206 OQLE045120 OQLE045122
Features of your vehicle
924
Press start button with key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position;
however; we recommend that you
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position for your safety.
OQLE045249 OQLE045125OQLE045128
493
Features of your vehicle
Door/Hood/Liftgate Open
• It means that any door, hood, or
liftgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times
and then illuminates, and also warn-
ing chime sounds once.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 4°C (40°F).
OQLE045207
OQLE045129 OQL045106
Features of your vehicle
944
✽✽NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive
more attentively and safely refrain-
ing from over-speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden braking or sharp
turning, etc.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
OQLE045208OQLE045131
495
Features of your vehicle
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 8.
Low Fuel
This warning message illuminates if
the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminated.
- When the trip computer displays
“--- km (or mile)” as range.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Check headlight
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-
function) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 9.
• If different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not displayed.
OQLE045209 OQLE045211 OQLE045133
Features of your vehicle
964
Check AEB system (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system. In this case, have
your vehicle be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
For more details, refer to
“Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system” in chapter 6.
Check Smart Phone Wireless
Charger (if equipped)
If a smart phone is still left on the
wireless charging pad unattended,
even when the ignition is in ACC
OFF and the instrument panel's one
time driving information mode has
finished, a warning message will light
up on the instrument panel.
For more details, refer to “Smart
Phone Wireless Charger” in this
chapter.
Check high beam assist system
(if equipped)
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb or circuit malfunction) with the
headlamp. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OQLE045212
OQLE045135 OQLE045210
497
Features of your vehicle
Warning lights
✽✽NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Features of your vehicle
984
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 8).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system are still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminate with the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
499
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking thereby
increasing the risk of a crash
and injury. In this case, avoid
high speed driving and abrupt
braking. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
1004
✽✽NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4101
Features of your vehicle
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 8).
If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION - Catalytic
Converter Damage
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
Features of your vehicle
1024
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, it indicates that
there may be serious engine dam-
age or malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warn-
ing light stays on after the engine
is started, turn the engine off
immediately. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
CAUTION - Engine
damage
If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
WARNING - Low tire
pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
4103
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽NOTICE - Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning Light
The Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light may illumi-
nate when the Electronic Stability
control (ESC) Indicator Light comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not
working properly (This does not
indicate malfunction of the EPB).
Master Warning light
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driver
of the following situations
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB.
In this case, have the vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
EPB
Features of your vehicle
1044
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 6.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 6.
AFLS
4105
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in chapter 6).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
1064
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
High beam assist indica-
tor (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High beam
assist system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more details, refer to "High beam
assist" in this chapter.
4107
Features of your vehicle
Cruise
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 6.
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When the lane departure
warning system does not detect
the lane line.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 6.
AUTO
HOLD
SET
CRUISE
Features of your vehicle
1084
ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the Active ECO system is
activated by pressing the DRIVE
mode button.
• The ECO indicator (green) will illu-
minate to show that the Active
ECO is operating.
For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System" in
chapter 6.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “SPORT” mode
as drive mode.
• The SPORT indicator (orange) will
illuminate to show that the SPORT
is operating.
For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System” in
chapter 6.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
CAUTION - AWD Lock
Mode
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
4109
Features of your vehicle
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming if
any object is sensed within a distance
of 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors (➀) are limited.
Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear park-
ing assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated. If
you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Rear parking
assist system
Never rely solely on the rear
parking assist system. Always
perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your vehi-
cle. Some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the object's size or material.
OQL045400
OQLA045517
Features of your vehicle
1104
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the
back-up warning system is in oper-
ation is approximately 120 cm (47
in.) at the rear bumper center area,
60 cm (23.5 in.) at the rear bumper
both side area.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-
tently.
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
• When an object is within 30 cm (11
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally once the
moisture clears.
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
4111
Features of your vehicle
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
sound absorbent material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound consistently
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (12 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or cov-
ered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until the
material is removed using a soft
cloth.
• To prevent damage, do not push,
scratch or strike the sensor.
✽✽NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It cannot detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
Features of your vehicle
1124
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the gear to the
R (Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction in the rear parking
assist system. If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4113
Features of your vehicle
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 100 cm
(39 in.) in front and 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors (➀) are
limited. Whenever moving pay as
much attention to what is in front and
behind of you as you would in a vehi-
cle without a parking assist system.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist system button is
pressed with the ignition switch ON.
• The indicator of the parking assist
system button turns on automatical-
ly and activates the parking assist
system when you shift the gear to
the R (Reverse) position. It will turn
off automatically when you drive
above 30 km/h (18.6 mph).
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The parking assist system is a
supplementary function only.
The operation of the parking
assist system can be affected
by several factors (including
environmental conditions).
It is the responsibility of the
driver to always check the front
and rear views before and while
parking.
OQL045400
OQL045401
■Rear
■Front
OQL045402
Features of your vehicle
1144
• The sensing distance while backing
up is approximately 120 cm (47 in.)
when you are driving less than 10
km/h (6.2 mph).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 100 cm
(39 in.) when you are driving less
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
• The side sensors are activated
when you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position.
• If the vehicle speed is above
20km/h, the system automatically
turns off. To activate again, push
the button.
✽✽NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance
from the object is already less than
approximately 25 cm when the sys-
tem is ON.
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -Buzzer sounds
continuously
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
✽✽NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration
according to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
4115
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of
the sensors; It can not detect
objects in other areas where sen-
sors are not installed. Also, small
or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors
may not be detected by the sen-
sors. Always visually check behind
the vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the sys-
tems capabilities and limitations.
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to nor-
mal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive
noise such as vehicle horns, loud
motorcycle engines, or truck air
brakes can interfere with the sen-
sor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Features of your vehicle
1164
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
✽✽NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the speed
and shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm from the sensor,
or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may
be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽✽NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
4117
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more
of the below occurs you may have a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist sys-
tem. Always drive safely and cau-
tiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor. Always per-
form a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
• is displayed. (if equipped)
(blinks)
Features of your vehicle
1184
The rearview camera will activate
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the rearview display mirror
while backing up unless equipped
with a navigation system, then will
display on the screen.
The rearview camera may be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press
the ON/OFF button again when the
ignition switch is on and the shift
lever is in R (Reverse). Also, the
camera will turn on automatically
whenever the ignition switch is
turned off and on again.
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
inside/outside rearview mirrors and
the area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't be
seen by the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
❈If your vehicle is equipped with
AVN (Audio, Video and Navigation)
system, rearview display will show
behind the vehicle through the
AVN monitor while backing-up.
Refer to a separately supplied
manual for detailed information.
REARVIEW CAMERA
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing. You must
always use methods of viewing
the area behind you including
looking over both shoulders as
well as continuously checking all
three rear view mirrors. Due to
the difficulty of ensuring that the
area behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
OQL045403
OQL045404BR
4119
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged if the lights are left in the
ON position. The system automati-
cally shuts off the parking lights 30
seconds after the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of the road at night
and opens the driver’s side door.
If necessary, to keep the parking
lights on when the ignition key is
removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Daytime running light
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi-
cated lamp OFF when:
1. The headlight switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking & Tail light
(4) Headlight position
LIGHTING
OQL045491C
Features of your vehicle
1204
Parking & Tail light ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail, license and
instrument panel lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail, license
lights will turn ON.
✽✽NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will turn ON or OFF automati-
cally depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
When the light switch is positioned at
an auto light position, at first, the
wiper will turn on and then, after 5
seconds the head lamp will turn on
automatically.
If the head lamp has been turned on
due to this function of the vehicle, the
head lamp will turn off 60 seconds
after the wiper has been turned off.
OQL045469 OQL045405OQL045468
4121
Features of your vehicle
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever to you when the high
beam is on.The lever will return to its
original position.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
OQL045493C
OQL045492C
Features of your vehicle
1224
High Beam Assist (if equipped)
The High Beam Assist is a system
that automatically adjusts the head-
lamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
Operating condition
1.Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The High Beam Assist ( ) indica-
tor will illuminate.
3.The High Beam Assist will turn on
when vehicle speed is above
40 kph (25 mph).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the High Beam Assist is operat-
ing, the High Beam Assist will
turn off and the high beam will be
on continuously. The High Beam
Assist ( ) indicator will turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the High Beam Assist is
operating, the High Beam Assist
will turn off.
4.If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the High Beam
Assist will turn off and the low
beam will be on continuously.
The high beam switches to low beam
in the below conditions.
- When the High Beam Assist is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not need-
ed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When vehicle speed is below
24 kph (15 mph).
- When headlamp / taillamp of bicy-
cle/motorcycle is detected
OQL045470
4123
Features of your vehicle
The system may not operate normal-
ly in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of lamp damage, hidden
from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-coming or
front vehicle is covered with dust,
snow or water.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of exhaust fume, smoke,
fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered
with foreign matters such as ice,
dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape lamp
with the front vehicle’s lamps.
• When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not repaired
or replaced at an authorized deal-
er.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow curved
road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad or
curved road.
• When there is a traffic light, reflect-
ing sign, flashing sign or mirror.
• When the road conditions are bad
such as being wet or covered with
snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog lamps on.
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from a
flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (lane departure
warning system) warning light illu-
minates. (if equipped)
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have the windshield glass replaced
from an authorized dealer.
• Do not remove or damage related
parts of the High Beam Assist sys-
tem.
• Be careful that water doesn’t get
into the High Beam Assist unit.
• Do not place objects on the dash-
board that reflect light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys-
tem may malfunction if sunlight is
reflected.
• At times, the Smart High Beam
system may not work properly,
always check the road conditions
for your safety. When the system
does not operate normally, manu-
ally change between the high
beam and low beam.
Features of your vehicle
1244
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A).The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
✽✽NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OQL045049
OQLA045514
4125
Features of your vehicle
Check headlight
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-
function) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.
• If the different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not displayed.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
have system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQL045405
OQLA055176
Features of your vehicle
1264
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· HI – Continuous wipe
· LO – Intermittent wipe*
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*
* if equipped
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
OQL045407/OQL045464
Rear window wiper/washer
4127
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
Front windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
OQL045409
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
Features of your vehicle
1284
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : Continuous wipe
LO : Intermittent wipe
OFF : OFF
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
OQL045465
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
4129
Features of your vehicle
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever
OQL045466
Features of your vehicle
1304
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off, if the
lights are in the ON position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
3 seconds after the system in armed
stage.
Room lamp
• : The light stays on at all times.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
WARNING - Interior
Lights
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights. OQL045418
OQL045412
■ Type B
■ Type A
4131
Features of your vehicle
Map lamp
• Press the lens (1) to turn ON the
map lamp.
To turn the map lamp OFF press
the lens (1) again.
• (2) : DOOR mode
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on for approximately 30 sec-
onds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode, press
the DOOR button (2) once again
(not pressed).
✽✽NOTICE
The DOOR mode and ROOM mode
can not be selected at the same time.
Front Room Lamp:
• Type A
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps
on.
(4): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps
off.
• Type B
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on
and off.
OQLE045411
OQL045410
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1324
Liftgate room lamp
The liftgate room lamp comes on
when the liftgate is opened.
✽✽NOTICE
The liftgate lamp comes on as long
as the liftgate lid is open. To prevent
unnecessary charging system drain,
close the liftgate lid securely after
using the liftgate.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary battery
drain, close the glove box securely
after using the glove box.
OQL045415OQL045416OQL045472
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity mir-
ror lamp is not in use. If the sun-
visor is closed without the lamp
off, it may discharge the battery
or damage the sunvisor.
4133
Features of your vehicle
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Headlight (Headlamp) escort
function
The headlights (and/or taillights)
remain on for approximately 5 min-
utes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-
tion. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter or smart key twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
Pocket lamp (if equipped)
When all doors are locked and
closed, the pocket lamp will come on
for 15 seconds if any of the below is
performed.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
Features of your vehicle
1344
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton located in the center facia switch
panel. The indicator on the rear win-
dow defroster button illuminates
when the defroster is ON. If there is
heavy accumulation of snow on the
rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster. The rear win-
dow defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 20 minutes or
when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OQL045302
■Type A
■ Type B
4135
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OQL045300L
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. Mode selection button
7. Temperature control button
✽✽NOTICE
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
1364
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position (if
equipped).
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OQLE045304
4137
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent MAX
A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-
Defrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
✽✽NOTICE - 2nd row outlet
vents (E,F)
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet
vents is controlled by the front cli-
mate control system and delivered
through the inside air duct of the
floor (E, F).
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet
vents (E, F) may be weaker than
the instrument panel vents for the
long air duct.
OQL045303
Features of your vehicle
1384
MAX A/C selection
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
OQL045305 OQL045307
OQL045306
4139
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale. In addition, prolonged use of
the air conditioning with the recircu-
lated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passen-
ger compartment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculat-
ed air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
WARNING - Reduced visi-
bility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
OQL045308
Features of your vehicle
1404
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OQL045309 OQL045310
4141
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with refrigerant*.
1.Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the position.
3.Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians to insure proper and
safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be repaired
or replaced with one removed from
a used or salvaged vehicle and new
replacement MAC evaporators
should be certified (and labeled) as
meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Features of your vehicle
1424
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
CAUTION - Excessive AC
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the tempera-
ture gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system opera-
tion may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air con-
ditioning system off if the tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
When opening the windows in
humid weather, air conditioning
may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since exces-
sive water droplets may cause
damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
4143
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent cli-
mate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system should be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air condi-
tioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1444
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified techni-
cians.
4145
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OQL045301L/OQL045329L
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Front windshield defroster button
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Air conditioning button
6. Air intake control button
7. OFF button
8. Fan speed control button
9. Mode selection button
10. Passenger's temperature control knob
11. SYNC temperature control selection but-
ton
12. Climate control display
13. Climate information screen selection button
✽✽NOTICE
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
■■Type B
■■Type A
Features of your vehicle
1464
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the tem-
perature.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature.
✽✽NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The ‘AUTO’
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
OQL045311
■Driver’s side ■Passenger’s side
OQL045315
4147
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
OQL045312
OQL045313
Features of your vehicle
1484
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OQL045343L
■Type A
■ Type B
4149
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the extreme right.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the extreme left.
When turning the knob, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and pas-
senger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
OQL045306
■Driver’s side ■Passenger’s side
OQL045315
OQL045316
Features of your vehicle
1504
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob to adjust the driv-
er side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
OQL045317
4151
Features of your vehicle
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculat-
ed air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the button for higher speed, or push
( ) the button for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OQL045318
OQL045318L
■Type A
■Type B
OQL045319
OQL045319L
■Type A
■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1524
OFF mode
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still oper-
ate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
WARNING - Recirculated
Air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
on as this may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in
the oxygen level and/or body
temperature.
WARNING - Reduced
Visibility
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
OQL045320
4153
Features of your vehicle
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
OQL045321
Features of your vehicle
1544
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-1234yf refrigerant.
1.Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the position.
3.Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
Use
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the tempera-
ture gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system opera-
tion may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air con-
ditioning system off if the tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
When opening the windows in
humid weather, air conditioning
may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since exces-
sive water droplets may cause
damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
4155
Features of your vehicle
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 24,000 km
(15,000 miles) or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1564
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air condi-
tioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
CAUTION
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used, otherwise damage
to the vehicle may occur. To pre-
vent damage, the air conditioning
system in your vehicle should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
4157
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visi-
bility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed. OQL045322
Features of your vehicle
1584
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically press the correspon-
ding button manually.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OQL045323
OQL045324L
4159
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning is con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel automatic defog-
ging logic or return to the automatic
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. Within 3 seconds after pressing
the defroster button, press the air
intake control button at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OQL045325L OQL045326
Features of your vehicle
1604
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The recirculation indicator blinks 3
times with 0.5 second of interval. It
indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture on the inside of the
windshield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Operating the air con-
ditioning.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air condition-
ing
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
OQL045327
OQL045057
4161
Features of your vehicle
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
OQLA045328
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
Features of your vehicle
1624
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover can not close securely.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key. (if
equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the lever
(1) and the glove box will automati-
cally open. Close the glove box after
use.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
OQL045420LOQL045419
4163
Features of your vehicle
✽✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder push it up.
Luggage box
You can place tools, etc. in the box
for easy access.
Grasp the handle on the edge of the
cover and lift it.
WARNING - Glove Box
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass
holder. Heavier objects can be
thrown from the holder in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the
passengers.
OQL045421 OQL045458
Features of your vehicle
1644
Two types of luggage board
use (if equipped)
If the vehicle is equipped with a TMK
(Tire Mobility Kit) or a temporary tire,
you can make the luggage board to
flat (Type A) or lower (Type B) for
more luggage storage.
When you use the luggage board
(Type B), you should put it between
guides (1).
However, if the vehicle is equipped
with a full spare tire, you can make the
luggage board to only flat (Type A).
OQLA055177
OQLA055178
■ Type B
■ Type A
4165
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽✽NOTICE
Only bottles should be placed in the
holder labeled "Bottles Only."
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
OQLA045515
CAUTION
Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
OQL045424
OQL045426
■Front seat
■Rear seat
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not use heat to dry the cup
holders. This may damage the
cup holder.
Features of your vehicle
1664
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
■ Front seat
■ Rear seat
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽✽NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatical-
ly depending on the seat tempera-
ture.
OQL045430
OQL045432
■Front seat
■Rear seat
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OFF→HIGH( )→LOW( )
→
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
4167
Features of your vehicle
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to ventilate your seat
cushion, press the switch (blue
color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
• The seat warmer (with air ventila-
tion) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.
OQL045433 OQL045427
Features of your vehicle
1684
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration. Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged peri-
ods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the
plug may overheat and the fuse
may open.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return-
ing the sunvisor to its original
position, otherwise it could
result in battery discharge and
possible sunvisor damage.
OQL045428
OQL045429
■Front seat
■Rear seat
4169
Features of your vehicle
• Plug in battery equipped electronic
devices with reverse current protec-
tion. The current from the battery
may flow into the vehicle’s electri
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
USB charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size elec-
trical devices using a USB cable.The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent bat-
tery discharge.
• Only devices that fit the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pen, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may receive an
electric shock. OQL045482
Features of your vehicle
1704
Wireless smart phone charg-
ing system (if equipped)
A wireless smart phone charging
system located in front of the center
console
Firmly close all doors, and turn the
ignition to ACC or IGN ON. To start
wireless charging, place the smart
phone equipped with wireless charg-
ing function on the wireless charging
pad.
For best wireless charging results,
place the smart phone on the center
of the charging pad.
The wireless charging system is
designed for one smart phone
equipped with QI per single usage
only. Please refer to the smart phone
accessory cover or the smart phone
manufacturer homepage to check
whether your smart phone supports
QI function.
Wireless smart phone charging
1. Remove any object on the smart
phone charging pad including the
smart key. If there is any foreign
object on the pad other than a
smart phone, the wireless charging
function may not operate properly.
2. Place the smart phone on the cen-
ter of the wireless charging pad.
3. The indicator light will change to
orange once the wireless charging
begins. After the charging is com-
plete, the orange light will change
to green.
4. You can choose to turn the wireless
charging function to either ON or
OFF by selecting the USM on the
instrument cluster. (Please refer to
“Instrument Cluster” for details).
If the wireless charging does not
work, gently move your smart phone
around the pad until the charging indi-
cator light turns orange. Depending
on the smart phone, the charging indi-
cator light may not turn green even
after the charging is complete.
OQL045467BR
4171
Features of your vehicle
If the wireless charging is not func-
tioning properly, the orange light will
blink and flash for ten seconds then
turn off. In such cases, remove the
smart phone from the pad and
replace it on the pad again, or double
check the charging status.
If you leave the smart phone on the
charging pad when the vehicle igni-
tion is in OFF, the vehicle will alert
you through warning messages and
sound (applicable for vehicles with
voice guidance (function) after the
‘Good bye’ function on the instru-
ment cluster ends.
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
CAUTION - Metal in
Wireless Charging System
If any metallic object such as
coins is located between the
wireless charging system and
the smart phone, the charging
may be disrupted. Also, the
metallic object may heat up and
potentially damage the charging
system. If there is any metallic
object between the smart phone
and the charging pad, immedi-
ately remove the smart phone.
Remove the metallic object after
it has cooled down.
Features of your vehicle
1724
✽✽NOTICE
• When the interior temperature of
the wireless charging system rises
above a set temperature, the wire-
less charging will cease to func-
tion. After the interior tempera-
ture drops below the threshold,
the wireless charging function will
resume.
• The wireless charging may not
function properly when there is a
heavy accessory cover on the
smart phone.
• The wireless charging will stop
when using the wireless smart key
search function to prevent radio
wave disruption.
• The wireless charging will stop
when the smart key is moved out
of the vehicle with the ignition in
ON.
• The wireless charging will stop
when any of the doors is opened
(applicable for vehicles equipped
with smart keys).
• The wireless charging will stop
when the vehicle is turned OFF.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The wireless charging will stop
when the smart phone is not in
complete contact with the wireless
charging pad.
• Items equipped with magnetic
components such as credit card,
telephone card, bankbook, any
transportation ticket and such
may become damaged during
wireless charging.
• Place the smart phone on the cen-
ter of the charge pad for best
results. The smart phone may not
charge when placed near the rim
of the charging pad. When the
smart phone does get charged, it
may heat up excessively.
• For smart phones without built-in
wireless charging system, an
appropriate accessory has to be
equipped.
• Smart phones of some manufac-
turers may display messages on
weak current. This is due to the
particular characteristic of the
smart phone and does not imply a
malfunction on wireless charging
function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The indicator light of some manu-
facturers’ smart phones may still
be orange after the smart phone is
fully charged. This is due to the
particular characteristic of the
smart phone and not a malfunc-
tion of the wireless charging.
• When any smart phone without a
wireless charging function or a
metallic object is placed on the
charging pad, a small noise may
sound. This small sound is due to
the vehicle discerning compatibili-
ty of the object placed on the
charging pad. It does not affect
your vehicle or the smart phone in
any way.
4173
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
❈This actual feature may differ from the illus-
tration.
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor (s)
(if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
OQL045446
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OXM043309
■Type A ■Type B
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
OPS046500
Features of your vehicle
1744
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
Your vehicle was manufactured
with driver's side floor mat
anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in
place. To avoid any interference
with pedal operation, Kia rec-
ommends that only the Kia floor
mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
OQL045456
OQL045457
■Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehi-
cle, care should be taken when
carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.
WARNING - Luggage net
Always keep your face and
body out of the luggage net
recoil path and avoid using the
luggage net when the straps
have visible signs of wear or
damage. The luggage net can
snap and cause injuries.
4175
Features of your vehicle
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen,
pull the handle backward and insert
the edges into the slots.
When not in use cargo security
screen, follow below steps.
1. Pull up the luggage cover using
the handle(1).
2. Pull up a triangle-shaped cover
(2).
3. Place the cargo security screen on
the lower portion of the cargo
area.
OQL045461
OQL045458
OQL045459
OQL045460
WARNING - Cargo
Security Screen
Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
CAUTION
Do not place luggage on the
cargo security screen. This may
cause the security screen to
become damaged or malformed.
Features of your vehicle
1764
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
Crossbars and fixing components
needed to install the roof rack on
your vehicle may be obtained from
an authorized Kia dealer or other
qualified shop.
✽✽NOTICE
• The crossbars (if equipped) should
be placed in the proper load carry-
ing positions prior to placing items
onto the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, be sure not to position
cargo onto the roof rack in such a
way that it could interfere with
sunroof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being
used to carry cargo, the crossbars
may need to be repositioned if
wind noise is detected.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION - Loading Roof
Rack
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
• When you are carrying cargo
on the roof rack, do not oper-
ate the sunroof (if equipped).
This can damage the sunroof.
OQL045462
4177
Features of your vehicle
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be loaded
onto the roof rack. Distribute the
load as evenly as possible across
the crossbars (if equipped) and roof
rack and secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in excess
of the specified weight limit on the
roof rack may damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded onto
the roof rack. Avoid sudden starts,
braking, sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers or high speeds that may result
in loss of vehicle control or rollover
resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn corners
carefully when carrying items on the
roof rack. Severe wind updrafts,
caused by passing vehicles or natu-
ral causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items loaded on
the roof rack. This is especially true
when carrying large, flat items such
as wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off the
roof rack and cause damage to your
vehicle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make sure
the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack.The vehi-
cle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
Audio system
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Steering wheel audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• AUX, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Audio (With Touch Screen). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
• Features of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
• Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• SiriusXM Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Bluetooth®Wireless Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Voice Recognition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5
✽✽NOTICE
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Shark fin antenna
The shark fin antenna will receive the
AM, FM broadcast signals and
transmit data.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(If equipped)
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.
Audio system
25
AUDIO SYSTEM
OQL045447 OJF045127
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the audio
controls, do not operate the
steering wheel control buttons
simultaneously.
VOLUME ( / ) (1)
• Press the lever upward ( ) to
increase the volume.
• Press the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 0.8 sec-
onds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod®mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod®mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio
source.
FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD ➟
USB (iPod®) ➟AUX ➟ MY MUSIC ➟
BT Audio ➟ FM...
In addition to mode change, Power
on/off can be made by pressing this
button when the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when
the audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for
more than 0.8 seconds when the
audio is on.
MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
Audio system
53
Audio system
45
AUX, USB port
You can use the AUX port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to
plug in a USB device or iPod®.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
*iPod®is a Registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
How Vehicle Radio Works
FM reception
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
OQL045449
OJF045308L
Audio system
55
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM reception
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
FM radio station
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
OJF045309L OJF045310L
Audio system
65
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-
nals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
If this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
¢¢¢
JBM004 OJF045311L
WARNING - Cell phone use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe and
legal location to use a cellular
phone.
Audio system
57
QLB50000EU
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
Audio system
85
Features of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of FM1 ➟FM2 ➟AM ➟SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟SAT3.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD/USB(iPod®)/AUX
/My Music/Bluetooth®Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of CD ➟USB(iPod®) ➟AUX ➟My
Music ➟BT (Bluetooth®) Audio.
(4) PHONE
• Changes to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Press to turn power
on/off.
• Volume knob :Turn left/right to con-
trol volume.
(6) SEEK TRACK
• When pressed briefly
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current fre-
quency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
(7) RESET
• Forced system termination and
system restart.
Audio system
59
(8) DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
(9) CLOCK
• When pressed briefly : Display time
screen
• When pressed and held : Move to
the time setting mode
(10) SCAN
• Radio mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes
: previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
(11) SETUP
• Changes to Setup mode.
(12) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search Tracks/
channels/files.
(13) CAT/FOLDER
• SiriusXM Radio : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder
Audio system
105
✽✽NOTICE - Using Compact
Discs
• This device has been
manufactured to be com-
patible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-
uids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to prevent
disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damage
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign sub-
stances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign sub-
stances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and
playing times may occur depend-
ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-
duction method and the recording
method used.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a
soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also
result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
used. If problems persist, trying
using a different CD as continued
use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CD-
RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-
type CDs may not function in the
device. DATA discs cannot be
played. (However, such discs may
still operate but will do so abnor-
mally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-
shaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 sec-
onds, the disc will automatically
be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
Audio system
511
✽✽NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if it
is already connected when the
ignition is turned on. The USB
device may not operate properly if
the car ignition is turned on or off
with the USB device connected.
• Be careful for static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the vehicle's audio system
may not recognize the USB
depending on what firmware is
used by USB device or what files
are on the USB.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file for-
mat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector and bodily parts or for-
eign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnect-
ing of USB devices within short
periods of time may result in prod-
uct malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may dif-
fer depending on the type, size or
file formats stored on the USB.
Such differences in time are not
indications of malfunctions.
• The vehicle audio system only sup-
ports USB devices designed to
play music files
• USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Doing so may lead
to worsened performance or dam-
age to the audio system.
• The audio system may not recog-
nize the USB device if separately
purchased USB hubs and exten-
sion cables are being used.
Connect the USB device directly
with the USB port of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
on the USBs.
• The audio system may not operate
normally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
audio system.
(Continued)
Audio system
125
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a typi-
cal USB memory device (minia-
ture, keychain, etc.). For best
results, use a typical USB device
that has a metal case.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly rec-
ognized.
• The device may not operate prop-
erly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection fail-
ures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB
jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
Audio system
513
✽✽NOTICE - Using an iPod®
• iPod®is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod®with
your vehicle's audio system, you
must use a dedicated iPod®cable.
(the cable that is supplied when
purchasing iPod®/iPhone®prod-
ucts)
• If the iPod®is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds imme-
diately after connecting. If possi-
ble, connect the iPod®to the vehi-
cle with the iPod®stopped/paused.
• When the vehicle ignition is set to
ACC or ON, connecting the iPod®
through the iPod®cable will
charge the iPod®through the car
audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod®, and
the audio system are both active,
EQ effects could overlap and
cause sound deterioration and dis-
tortion. Whenever possible, turn
off the EQ feature within the
external device when it is connect-
ed to the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod®or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used,
disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod®or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the char-
acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone®is connected to
both the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock con-
nector or Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
• iPod®mode cannot be operated
when the iPod®cannot be recog-
nized due to versions that do not
support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod®Nano
devices, the iPod®may not be rec-
ognized when the battery level is
low. Please charge the iPod®for
use.
• The search/play orders shown
within the iPod®device may differ
from the orders shown within the
audio system.
• If the iPod®malfunctions due to
an iPod®device defect, reset the
iPod®and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod®manual)
(Continued)
Audio system
145
(Continued)
• Some iPod®products may not
sync with the System depending
on the version. If the Media is
removed before the Media is rec-
ognized, then the system may not
properly restore the previously
operated mode. (iPad®charging is
not supported.)
• Use an iPod®cable shorter than 1
meter in length such as the one
originally supplied with a new
iPod®, longer cables may lead to
the audio system not recognizing
the iPod®.
✽✽NOTICE - Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology phone has been con-
nected.
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
• If a Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Phone is being used to
play music and receives an incom-
ing or outgoing phone call, then
the music will stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises with some
mobile phones.
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or
making an outgoing call while
playing Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Audio may result in
audio interference.
Audio system
515
✽✽NOTICE - Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Cellular Phone
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-
free devices, stereo headsets, wire-
less remote controllers, etc. For
more information, visit the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com.
Before using Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology audio features.
• The Bluetooth®word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth®SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Kia
is under license. Other trade-
marks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth®enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Answering and placing
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
-Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
device auto connection
-Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
operations.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or per-
form Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
has been deactivated. Disable the
hidden state or activate the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
prior to searching/connecting with
the car audio system.
(Continued)
Audio system
165
(Continued)
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area. (e.g. in a tun-
nel, in an underground area, in a
mountainous area, etc.)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cel-
lular service stations can be dis-
turbed.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to the audio
system. In this case, storing the
device in a different location may
resolve the condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology your phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
to automatically connect your
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
phone, try the following.
1) Turn off the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
2) Turn off the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP] > [Phone] and [turn
off] the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology feature.
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
(Continued)
Audio system
517
(Continued)
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired
or connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• Bluetooth®Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http://www.
kia.com/us/en/content/owners/blu
etooth.
✽✽NOTICE
•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology phone allows the user
to conveniently make calls, receive
calls, and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
WARNING
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to neg-
ligent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device
excessively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time while
driving is dangerous and may
lead to accidents.
Audio system
185
✽✽NOTICE - Using Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user’s manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the opera-
tion of the voice recognition sys-
tem, pressing any button other
than the button will terminate
voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition per-
formance, position your head
below the microphone above the
driver’s seat and maintain proper
position when speaking voice com-
mands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
Audio system
519
Radio Mode
Radio Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
(5) A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
With the Radio Mode Button
Pressing the [RADIO] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [RADIO] button will display the
Radio Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Audio system
205
Seek
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
Tun e
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
tons to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
A.Store(Auto Store)
Press the [A.Store] button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen-
cies to Preset buttons.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to preview
frequencies with superior reception
for 5 seconds each.
Press and hold the [SCAN] button to
preview presets for 5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored. While
Scan is operating, pressing the
[SCAN] button will cancel the scan-
ning.
Audio system
521
SiriusXM®Satellite Radio infor-
mation
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-
month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package. You’ll get over 140
channels, including commercial-free
music, plus all your favorite sports,
exclusive talk, entertainment, and a
selection of premium programming.For
more information and a complete list
of SiriusXM channels, visit sir-
iusxm.com in the United States, sir-
iusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on a
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
Audio system
225
SiriusXM Radio Mode
Radio Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
(3) Preset
Displays current playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
(5) Info
Displays detailed information about
the current broadcast.
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number)/ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the
RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press
the [RADIO] button, and tune to
channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
Audio system
523
Seek
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Tun e
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the [SCAN]
button again will cancel the scan
operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
[CAT/FOLDER] button and press the
TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
✽✽Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold
one of the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons to
save the current channel to the
selected preset.
Audio system
245
Media Mode
Media Mode Screen
Pressing the [MEDIA] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of CD
➟
USB(iPod®)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [MEDIA] button will display the
Media Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
Mode Display on the Status Bar
When a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology,
iPod®, USB, or AUX device is con-
nected or a CD is inserted, the cor-
responding mode icon will be dis-
played.
Icon Title
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
CD
USB(iPod®)
AUX
Audio system
525
MENU : Audio CD
Audio CD Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
Audio system
265
With the Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next track.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton after the track has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
track from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton before the track has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start play-
ing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK]button to rewind or
fast-forward the current track.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Audio system
527
MENU : MP3 CD
MP3 CD Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays
the currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the fold-
er name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Audio system
285
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟Shuffle All ➟Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files with-
in the current folder in shuffle
order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat ➟Repeat Folder ➟Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Audio system
529
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
Audio system
305
MENU : USB
USB Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ opti-
on is set as the default display, the
folder name/file name are displayed
as detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Audio system
531
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟Shuffle All ➟Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in
the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat ➟Repeat Folder ➟Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and may result in
faulty list display or file search.
Normal operations will resume once
loading is complete.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
Audio system
325
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
Audio system
533
MENU : iPod®
iPod®Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the cur-
rently operating function.
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle
order.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
Audio system
345
With the iPod®Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod®Songs
Once an iPod®is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod®song.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
iPod®products with unsupported
communication protocols may not
properly operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the [SEEK TRACK]button to
move to the previous or next song.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton after the song has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton before the song has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod®product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
There are eight categories that can
be searched, including Playlists,
Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,
Composers, Audiobooks and
Podcasts.
Category Menu
(1) Displays the play screen
(2) Moves to the iPod®root category
screen
(3) Moves to the previous category
If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod®device.
Audio system
535
MENU : AUX
AUX Mode Display Controls
Press the [MEDIA] button Select
[AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will be
restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder,
car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
Audio system
365
MENU : My Music
My Music Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
Audio system
537
With the My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK
∨∨
]but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
List Menu
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Selects all files.
(3) Deselects all selected files.
(4) Deletes selected files.
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the [Delete] button to
delete the selected files.
If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved. Identical
files cannot be copied more than
1,000 times.
To check memory information, go to
[SETUP] [System] [Memory
Information]
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Audio system
385
MENU :
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
Using Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Audio
Once a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will
automatically start.
While playing, press the [II] button
to pause and press [II] button to
play.
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the [SETUP] button [Phone] button
to display the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone.
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device after converting
to
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
Audio system
539
Phone Mode
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command wait-
ing state
When pressed and held
- Ends voice recognition
(2) Each time this button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2
➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®)➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, correspon-
ding modes will be disabled.
(3) Used to control volume.
(4) Mutes audio volume.
(5) When pressed shortly
- Radio mode : searches broad-
cast frequencies saved to pre-
sets.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/
BT Audio) modes : changes the
track, file or chapter.
When pressed and held
- Radio mode, automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(6) When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call wait-
ing, switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
When pressed and held
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree is con-
nected)
(7) Ends phone call
Audio system
405
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
When No Devices have been
Paired
➀Press the [PHONE] button or the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel controls. The following
screen is displayed.
➁Press the [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
• Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device
• Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
➂From your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
❈SSP: Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➃After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
SSP supported device :
➃After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
➄Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
Audio system
541
✽✽NOTICE
If Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] but-
ton on the steering wheel controls dis-
plays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a previ-
ously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Pair]
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section “When
No Devices have been Paired” on the
previous page.
Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone List]
• Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
• Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1) button.
Audio system
425
Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the [Disconnect](2) button.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3) button.
✽✽NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
Changing Priority
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices with the
car audio system. The “Change
Priority” feature is used to set the
connection priority of paired phones.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
[Change priority](4) button from the
Menu. The selected device will be
changed to the highest priority.
Audio system
543
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
[PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts can be saved for
easy access
• Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
• Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
• Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
• Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings.
✽✽NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contact data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks
to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
• Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
• To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
• Delete All : Deletes all stored
favorite contacts
✽✽NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Audio system
445
Call History
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to
download the call history.
• Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call histo-
ry)
- Connects call upon selection
• Download : Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
• Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contact
entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Sort by : Find a contact in alpha-
betical order.
• Download : Download contact entries.
Audio system
545
✽✽NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology device has been dis-
connected. (However, the contacts
and call history saved to the phone
will be deleted if a paired phone is
deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth®streaming
audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off within the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
• Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
• Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number, If no
number has been entered, switch-
es to call history screen
• End : Deletes the entered phone
number
• Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Audio system
465
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
• Accept : Accepts the incoming call
• Reject : Rejects the incoming call
✽✽NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
During a Handsfree Call
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
• Call time : Displays the call time
• End : Ends call
• Private : Converts to Private mode
• Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party
• Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Audio system
547
Voice Recognition Mode
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the button on the
steering wheel controls. Say a com-
mand.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [ON]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[ON]/[OFF], go to [SETUP]
[System] [Prompt Feedback]
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
✽✽NOTICE
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim” etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names)
for all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “aster-
isk*”, “ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the button on
the steering wheel controls.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “Beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the button on the
steering wheel controls.
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “Beep”, say the
voice command.
Audio system
485
Illustration on Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the button :
Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the button :
Shortly pressing the button :
Ending Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the button :
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
(BEEP)
Audio system
549
Voice Command List
Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used
anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used
within the current mode.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name>
on Mobile Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name>
in Office Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts.
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name>
at Home Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name>
on Other Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute cor-
responding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Command Function
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
command, say the name of a contact saved in the
Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
command, you can say the number that you want
to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
and Bluetooth®connections
Radio
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟SAT1➟SAT2➟
SAT3➟FM1
)
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio, main-
tains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
Audio system
505
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in
FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding fre-
quency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding fre-
quency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM®screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite)
1~3 Displays the selected SiriusXM®screen.
SIRIUS Channel
0~223 Plays the selected SiriusXM®channel.
M
edia
Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays music on the CD.
USB
Plays music on the USB device.
iPod®Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music
Plays music saved in My Music
.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth®
device.
Mute
Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
Audio system
551
FM/AM Radio Commands
Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.
Satellite Radio Commands
Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan
Moves to the next preset from the current present
and plays for 10 seconds each.
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
Audio system
525
Audio CD Commands
Commands available during Audio CD operation.
MP3 CD/USB Commands
Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Audio system
553
iPod®Commands
Commands available during iPod®operation.
My Music Commands
Commands available during My Music operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an addi-
tional confirmation process.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current cate-
gory.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential
order.
Audio system
545
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology Audio Commands
Commands available during
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone opera-
tion Command Operation.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Audio system
555
Setup Mode
Press the [SETUP] button to display
the Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and
[System].
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Display]
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Mode Pop
up] and [Media Display].
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day or Night
mode.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
• Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high.
• Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low.
Mode Pop up
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
button will display the Mode Pop up
screen.
✽✽NOTICE
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
Audio system
565
Media Display
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song name.
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Sound]
You can select and control options
related to [Sound Settings], [Speed
Dependent Vol.], [Voice Recognition
Vol.] and [Touch Screen Beep].
Sound Settings
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] but-
tons to adjust the Fader/Balance set-
tings.
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
Audio system
557
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Voice Recognition Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Audio system
585
With the Clock/Calendar Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Clock/Calendar]
You can select and control options
related to [Clock Settings], [Calendar
Settings], [Time Format] and [Clock
Display].
Clock Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
Press and hold the [CLOCK] button
to display the Clock/Calendar
screen.
Calendar Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Time Format
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
Audio system
559
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone]
You can select and control options
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Contacts Download],
[Auto Download], [Outgoing Volume]
and [Bluetooth System Off].
Pairing a New Device
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/Disconnects currently
selected phone
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
(4) Change priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest con-
nection priority
Audio system
605
✽✽NOTICE - Before
Downloading Contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the [SEEK
TRACK] button.
Audio system
561
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Once
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio sys-
tem.
To turn
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to [SETUP]
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[System]
You can select and control options
related to [Memory Information],
[Prompt Feedback] and [Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
• Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
• Capacity : Displays total capacity
Audio system
625
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
• ON : When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts
• OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
Language
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
Audio system
563
iPod®is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod®mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth®word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth®SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under
license. SiriusXM services require
a subscription sold separately, or
as a package, by Sirius XM Radio
Inc. If you decide to continue serv-
ice after your trial, the subscrip-
tion plan you choose will automat-
ically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your
chosen payment method at then-
current rates. Fees and taxes
apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.sir-
iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with cover-
age limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
trademark of Google, Inc.
BlackBerry is a registered trade-
mark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
Audio system
645
Declaration of Conformity
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 6-9
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . . 6-22
• For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
• AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) . . . . . . . 6-51
• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
• AEB warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 6-54
• Brake operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
• Sensor to detect the distance from the
vehicle in front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
• System malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
• Downhill Brake Control (DBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
• Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
• To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. 6-68
• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
• To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 6-70
• Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
• Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 6-80
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
• Conditions that cause the LDWS not to operate . . . 6-82
• Conditions that cause missed warnings and
false warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 6-91
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 6-92
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
6
63
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system does
not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change in
the sound of the exhaust or if you drive
over something that strikes the under-
neath side of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open liftgate
Do not drive with the liftgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger com-
partment. If you must drive with
the liftgate open proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
Driving your vehicle
46
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 8,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any handled devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the drive should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
65
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Check sur-
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
Driving your vehicle
66
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The ignition key can be removed only
in the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The electrical accessories are opera-
tive. If difficulty is experienced turn-
ing the ignition switch to the ACC
position, turn the key while turning
the steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the dri-
ver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for auto-
matic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
OQL055065
OQL055066
67
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
WARNING - Key holder
Do not place small purses, mul-
tiple keys, or other heavy acces-
sories on your vehicle key ring.
The driver can accidently push
these objects causing the ACC
position to change while in
motion and disrupt the proper
operation of some of the vehi-
cle's safety features.
WARNING - Leaving the
Vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden
vehicle movement, never leave
your vehicle if the transmission
is not locked in the P (Park)
position and the parking brake
is fully engaged. Before leaving
the driver's seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged in
P (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
WARNING - Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may
interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
86
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 sec-
onds), then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle is
still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the tur-
bocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv-
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
run the engine on idle condition
about 1 minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine imme-
diately after it has been subject-
ed to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbo charger unit.
69
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the trans-
mitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OQL055003
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
106
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without depress-
ing the brake pedal for automatic
transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the ENGINE START/STOP
button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ACC ➔ON ➔OFF or ACC
Amber Super red
Not illuminated
611
Driving your vehicle
✽✽ NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1. Carry the smart key or place it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the tur-
bocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv-
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute
before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off imme-
diately after it has been subject-
ed to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbocharger unit.
Driving your vehicle
126
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key is not in the vehi-
cle" will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.The
indicator or warning will turn off
while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC posi-
tion. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
OQL055004
613
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽✽NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OQL055007
++
++
((
((UU
UUPP
PP))
))
--
--
((
((DD
DDOO
OOWW
WWNN
NN))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
Driving your vehicle
146
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release but-
ton when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
WARNING - Leaving
Vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is locked in
the P position and set the park-
ing brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
chapter.
615
Driving your vehicle
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking
and you want the vehicle to move
when pushed.
1. After parking your vehicle,
depress the brake pedal and move
the shift lever to [P] with the igni-
tion button in [ON] or while the
engine is running.
2. If the parking brake is applied
unlock the parking brake.
- For EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) equipped vehicles, push
the brake pedal with the ignition
button in [ON] or while the engine
is running to disengage the park-
ing brake. If [AUTO HOLD] func-
tion is used while driving (If
[AUTO HOLD] indicator is on in
the cluster), press [AUTO HOLD]
switch and [AUTO HOLD] func-
tion should be turn off.
3. While pressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehicles,
the ignition switch can be moved
to [OFF] only when the shift lever
is in [P].
4. Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while pressing the brake
pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] button or inserting,
pressing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT
LOCK RELEASE] access hole at
the same time. Then, the vehicle
will move when external force is
applied.
CAUTION - Shifting
• With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park the
vehicle in [P] (Park) for safety
and engage the parking brake.
• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)
gear, first make sure the park-
ing ground is level and flat. Do
not park in [N] gear on any
slopes or gradients.
If parked and left in [N], the
vehicle may move and cause
serious damage and injury.
• After the ignition switch has
been turned off, the electronic
parking brake cannot be dis-
engaged.
• For EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) equipped vehicles with
[AUTO HOLD] function used
while driving, if the ignition but-
ton has been turned [OFF], the
electronic parking brake will be
engaged automatically.
Therefore, [AUTO HOLD] func-
tion should be turned off before
the ignition button is turned off.
Driving your vehicle
166
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear. Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
manual mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
OQL055009
Manual
mode
++
++
((
((UU
UUPP
PP))
))
--
--
((
((DD
DDOO
OOWW
WWNN
NN))
))
617
Driving your vehicle
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D position or
the manual mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
10 km/h (6.2 mph).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower than
10 km/h (6.2 mph), if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you shift the shift lever
from D (Drive) to manual mode and
shift it from manual mode to D (Drive)
again, the system changes from
manual mode to automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
✽✽NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you cannot
shift the gear.
OQL055010
Driving your vehicle
186
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise & vibration near the
shift lever may be heard. It is a nor-
mal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OQLE055008
619
Driving your vehicle
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
override access hole then install
the cap.
7.We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
✽✽NOTICE - Kickdown
Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
sure point. The automatic transaxle
will shift to a lower gear depending
on the engine speed.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
Driving your vehicle
206
Engine power can be delivered to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. AWD is useful when extra
traction is required on road, such as,
when driving on slippery, muddy,
wet, or snow-covered roads. These
vehicles are not designed for chal-
lenging off-road use.
Occasional off-road use such as
established unpaved roads and trails
are OK. It is always important when
traveling off-highway that the driver
carefully reduces the speed to a level
that does not exceed the safe oper-
ating speed for those conditions. In
general, off-road conditions provide
less traction and braking effective-
ness than normal road conditions.
* AWD : All Wheel Drive
FWD : Front Wheel Drive
The driver must be especially alert to
avoid driving on slopes which tilt the
vehicle to either side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road. Keeping
the vehicle in contact with the driving
surface and under control in these
conditions is always the driver's
responsibility for the safety of him/her-
self and his or her passengers.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Off road
driving
Do not attempt to operate your
vehicle under extreme or chal-
lenging off road driving condi-
tions. Although this vehicle has
off-road capability, it was not
designed to be driven off road.
OQL055060L
OQL055060
■Type A
■Type B
621
Driving your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
If the AWD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates that
there is a malfunction in the AWD
system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Tight corner brake effect
✽✽NOTICE - AWD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed while in all wheel
drive, steering control will be difficult.
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all wheel drive vehi-
cles caused by the difference in tire
rotation at the four wheels and the
zero-degree alignment of the front
wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
Driving your vehicle
226
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
✽✽NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indi-
cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivat-
ed. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional FWD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional FWD vehicles.
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
623
Driving your vehicle
For safe all wheel drive opera-
tion
✽✽NOTICE - All wheel drive
The conditions of on-road or off-
road that demand all wheel drive
mean all functions of your vehicle
are exposed to extreme stress than
under normal road conditions. Slow
down and be ready for changes in
the composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you have
any doubt about the safety of the
conditions you are facing, stop and
consider the best way to proceed. Do
not exceed the ability of yourself or
your vehicle to operate safely.
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
• When you are driving up or down
hills drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution in going up or
down steep hills, since you may flip
your vehicle over depending on the
grade, terrain and water/mud con-
ditions.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of
steep hills can be extremely
dangerous. This danger can
come from slight changes in the
wheel angle which can destabi-
lize the vehicle or, even if the
vehicle is maintaining stability
under power, it can lose that
stability if the vehicle stops its
forward motion. Your vehicle
may roll over without warning
and without time for you to cor-
rect a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
HILL1 HILL2
Driving your vehicle
246
• You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in a
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional FWD
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in
AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel firm-
ly when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground.You
could also lose control of your
steering wheel while driving on
rough terrain.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind,
the vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity and requires
you to drive more slowly.
OQLE055127
WARNING - AWD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners.The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional FWD vehi-
cles, making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
625
Driving your vehicle
• If you need to drive in the water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehi-
cle.
• Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water. Press
the brake pedal several times as
you move slowly until you feel nor-
mal braking forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled mainte-
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in section
8). Always wash your vehicle thor-
oughly after off-road use, especially
cleaning the bottom of the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the per-
formance of the AWD vehicle is
greatly affected by the condition of
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehi-
cle with four tires of the same size
and type.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compart-
ment and wet the ignition sys-
tem, causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop. If this happens
and your vehicle is in a tilted
position, your vehicle may roll
over.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at high speed.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over-steers to re-enter the
roadway. In the event your
vehicle leaves the roadway, do
not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
Driving your vehicle
266
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehi-
cles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. There
are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow,
etc. the vehicle can sometimes
be driven out by depressing the
accelerator pedal further; how-
ever, do not run the engine con-
tinuously at high rpms to free
the vehicle from snow or mud
because doing so could dam-
age the AWD system
WARNING - Replacement
tires
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in the tire
section of the manual.
Installation of variant tires can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle.
627
Driving your vehicle
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
✽✽NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake
while performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a FWD roll tester. If a
FWD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester (1) for a speedometer test
as shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-
porary free roller (2) as shown in
the illustration.
✽✽NOTICE
When lifting up the vehicle, do not
operate front and rear wheel sepa-
rately. All four wheels should be
operated.
WARNING - Jacked
vehicle
While the full-time AWD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the
tires to rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the
jack and to jump forward. OQL055051
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. This
is very dangerous as the vehi-
cle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION
If you need to operate the front
wheel and rear wheel when lift-
ing up the vehicle, you should
release the parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
286
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
629
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
Driving your vehicle
306
Parking brake – Foot type
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
OQL055013
OQL055015
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parked to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicles
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
631
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Electronic parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electronic parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
W-75
OQLA055016
Driving your vehicle
326
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you press the EPB switch after the
engine is turned off, the EPB will not
be Applied.
✽✽NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer, if the vehicle does not remain
at a standstill, do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more
than 3 seconds.
Do not operate the parking brake/
EPB while the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
✽✽NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electronic parking
brake), press the EPB switch while
doing the following:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• The shift lever must be in P (Park).
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
OQL055017
633
Driving your vehicle
To release EPB (electronic parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
• Automatic Transaxle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and tailgate.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R (Rear),
D (Drive) or manual mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽✽NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the ignition
switch or engine stop/start button
is in the OFF position, but you
cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
Do not follow the above procedure
when driving on a flat level ground.
The vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward.
✽✽NOTICE
If the parking brake warning light is
still on even though the EPB has
been released, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
EPB (electronic parking brake) may
be automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
✽✽NOTICE
If the driver turns the engine off by
mistake while Auto Hold is operat-
ing, EPB will be automatically
applied. (Vehicles equipped with
Auto Hold)
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
Driving your vehicle
346
System warning
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but the EPB doesn't
release automatically, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood, driver's
door or trunk is opened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress
the brake pedal and release EPB by
pressing the EPB switch.
• A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet, make
sure to inform him/her how to oper-
ate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelerator
pedal, depress it slowly.
OQLE055159
WARNING - Parking
Brake Use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parked to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedes-
trians.
635
Driving your vehicle
System warning
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
✽✽NOTICE
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
System warning
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated because of ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) signal, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
OQLE055079
OQLE055073
■Type A
■Type B
OQLE055078
OQLE055076
■Type A
■Type B
Driving your vehicle
366
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few min-
utes. The warning light will go off
and the EPB switch will operate
normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back up.
If the EPB warning does not go off,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQL055059
637
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
✽✽NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
If you notice a continuous noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
When the EPB (electronic parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer by loading the vehicle on
a flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
WARNING
Do not operate the electronic
parking brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Applying the electronic
parking brake while the vehicle is
moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control of
the vehicle. If you must use the
electronic parking brake to stop
the vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
Driving your vehicle
386
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
1. Depress the brake pedal, start the
engine and then press the Auto
Hold button. The white AUTO
HOLD indicator will come on indi-
cating the system is in standby.
Before the Auto Hold will engage,
the driver's door, engine hood
must be closed and the driver's
seat belt must be fastened.
2. When coming to a complete stop
by depressing the brake pedal, the
AUTO HOLD indicator changes
from white to green indicating the
AUTO HOLD is engaged and EPB
is applied. The vehicle will remain
at a standstill even if you release
the brake pedal.
3. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
OQL055018
WW
WWhh
hhii
iitt
ttee
ee
OQL055019
WW
WWhh
hhii
iitt
ttee
ee
GG
GGrr
rree
eeee
eenn
nn
639
Driving your vehicle
4. If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in D (Drive) or
manual mode, the Auto Hold will
be released automatically and the
vehicle will start to move. The indi-
cator changes from green to white
indicating the Auto Hold is in
standby and the EPB is released.
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal
for a smooth launch.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
✽✽NOTICE
• The following are conditions when
the Auto Hold will not engage
(Auto Hold light will not turn
green and the Auto Hold system
remains in stand by):
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R
(Reverse)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB
under any of the following condi-
tions (Auto Hold light remains
white and the EPB automatically
applies):
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
OQL055018
LL
LLii
iigg
gghh
hhtt
tt
oo
ooff
ffff
ff
Driving your vehicle
406
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, engine hood open detec-
tion system, the Auto Hold may not
work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
✽✽NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
Warning messages
Parking brake automatically locked
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, do not activate Auto Hold
while driving downhill, backing
up or parking your vehicle.
OQLE055078
OQLE055076
■Type A
■Type B
641
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
✽✽NOTICE
When this message is displayed, the
Auto Hold and EPB may not oper-
ate. For your safety, depress the
brake pedal.
Press brake pedal to deactivate AUTO
HOLD
If you do not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
OQLE055079
OQLE055073
■Type A
■Type B
OQLE055080
OQLE055081
■Type A
■Type B
Driving your vehicle
426
AUTO HOLD conditions not met.
Close door, hood, and fasten seatbelt
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver’s door, engine
hood are not closed or the driver’s
seat belt is unfastened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear on the LCD display. At this
moment, press the [AUTO HOLD]
button after closing the driver’s door,
engine hood and fastening the seat
belt.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehicle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the sit-
uation allows the ABS to control the
force being delivered to the brakes.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
OQLE055082
643
Driving your vehicle
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on at
the same time. This happens because
of low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
Driving your vehicle
446
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse condi-
tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
OQL055020
645
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slip-
pery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
-
Driving your vehicle
466
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
OQLE045234
OQLE055085
■Type A
■Type B
OQLE045235
OQLE055086
■Type A
■Type B
■ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
647
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽✽NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
WARNING - Electronic sta-
bility control
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control (ESC). It can only assist
you in maintaining control under
certain circumstances.
Driving your vehicle
486
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS- Electronic Power Steering).
This is only the effect of brake and
EPS control and indicates nothing
unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a sloping road such as a
gradient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
WARNING - Tire/
Wheel size
When replacing tires and wheels,
make sure they are the same size
as the original tires and wheels
installed. Driving with varying
tire or wheel sizes may diminish
any supplemental safety benefits
of the VSM system.
649
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽✽NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 22 km/h (13
mph) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu surface. A split-mu sur-
face is made of two surfaces which
have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions – including driving in clement
weather and on a slippery road.
✽✽NOTICE
For maximum protection, always
wear your seat belt. No system, no
matter how advanced, can compen-
sate for all driver error and/or driv-
ing conditions. Always drive respon-
sibly.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped on
an incline. While stopped, make
sure you maintain brake pres-
sure sufficient to prevent your
vehicle from rolling backward
and causing an accident. Don’t
release the brake pedal until you
are ready to accelerate forward.
Driving your vehicle
506
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at all
times. If the braking action does not
return to normal, stop as soon as it
is safe to do so and call an author-
ized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling.
If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position.This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on an
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transaxle to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
651
Driving your vehicle
AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
The AEB system is to reduce or to
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the
distance from the vehicle ahead or
the pedestrian through the sensors
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec-
essary, warns the driver of accident
risk with the warning message or the
warning alarms.
✽✽NOTICE
Take the following precautions when
using the Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to,
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sensors
are limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road conditions or
while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. AEB does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and
'Autonomous Braking System'. The
AEB deactivates, when the driver
cancels the system setting.
WARNING
- Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Limitations
The AEB system is a supple-
mental system and is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
OQLA055135
Driving your vehicle
526
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. When the warning
light remains ON with the AEB acti-
vated, we recommend you to have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the ini-
tial Forward Collision Warning
include the following:
• EARLY - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maxi-
mizes the amount of dis-
tance between the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Even though FCW is set in
early mode, if the vehicle in
front stops abruptly, the
FCW warning may be dis-
played later than anticipat-
ed.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision
Warning is activated nor-
mally. This setting allows
for a nominal amount of
distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial
warning occurs.
OQLA055136
OQLE045236
653
Driving your vehicle
• LATE - When this condition is
selected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activat-
ed later than normal. This
setting reduces the amount
of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning
occurs.
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB will activate activated when
the AEB is selected on the LCD dis-
play, and when the following prereq-
uisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- The driving speed is over 6 mph.
(The AEB only works within a cer-
tain range of vehicle speeds)
- When the AEB recognizes a vehi-
cle or the pedestrian in front. (The
AEB may not recognize every
obstacle or provide warnings and
braking in every situation, so do
not rely on the AEB to stop the
vehicle in instances where the driv-
er sees an obstacle and has the
ability to apply the brakes)
• The AEB automatically activates
when you turn the vehicle on.
The driver can deactivate the AEB
by canceling the in the system set-
ting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates
when canceling the ESC.When the
ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot
be activated on the LCD display.
WARNING
To avoid driver distractions, do
not attempt to set or cancel the
AEB while operating the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
546
AEB warning message and
system control
The AEB produces warning mes-
sages, warning alarms, and emer-
gency braking based on the level of
risk of a frontal collision, such as
when a vehicle ahead suddenly
brakes, when there is no following dis-
tance from the vehicle in front, or
when it detects a collision with a
pedestrian is imminent.
Forward Warning (1st warning)
The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB applies the brakes within
certain limit to reduce the impact
from a collision.
OQLE055132 OQLE055133
655
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB controls the brakes with-
in certain limit to release shock
from the collision.
The AEB controls the maximum
brakes just before the collision.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly turns
the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly canceled, when risk factors dis-
appear.
The driver should always exercise
caution when operating the vehicle,
even though there is no warning
message or warning alarm.
✽✽NOTICE
The AEB operates in accordance
with the risk levels, such as the dis-
tance from the vehicle/passer-by in
front, the speed of the vehicle/pass-
er-by in front, and the driver's vehi-
cle operation.
Do not drive the vehicle dangerously
to activate the AEB system on pur-
pose.
OQLE055134
WARNING
The AEB cannot avoid all colli-
sions. The AEB might not com-
pletely stop the vehicle before
collision, due to ambient weath-
er and road conditions. The
driver has the responsibility to
drive safely and control the
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
566
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front
(front radar)
The sensor is to maintain a certain
distance from the vehicle in front.
However, the smudged sensor or
sensor cover with foreign sub-
stances, such as snow and rain,
adversely affects the sensing per-
formance.
It may even temporarily cancel the
AEB. Always keep the sensor clean.
Warning message and warning
light
When the sensor is covered or the
sensor is dirty with foreign sub-
stances, such as snow or rain, the
AEB operation may temporarily stop.
In this case, a warning message will
appear to notify the driver.
OQLE045237
OQLE055147
■Type A
■Type B
OQLA055021
OQL055021
■AWD
■2WD
657
Driving your vehicle
This is not a malfunction with the
AEB. To operate the AEB again,
remove the foreign substances.
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not install any accessories, such
as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may adverse-
ly affect the sensing performance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to
external force, the system may not
operate correctly even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, we recommend you to have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not arbitrarily apply
paint on the sensor cover.
System malfunction
• When the AEB is not working prop-
erly, the AEB warning light ( ) will
illuminate and the warning mes-
sage will appear for a few seconds.
After the message disappears, the
master warning light ( ) will illu-
minate. In this case, we recommend
you to have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
OQLE045228
OQLE055158
■Type A
■Type B
Driving your vehicle
586
• The AEB may unnecessarily pro-
duce warning messages and warn-
ing alarms. Due to the sensing lim-
itation, the AEB may not produce
warning messages or warning
alarm at all.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB, the braking control does
not operate upon detecting a colli-
sion risk even with other braking
systems normally operating.
• The AEB operates only for the
vehicle / pedestrian in front, while
driving forward. It does not operate
for any animals or vehicles in the
opposite direction.
• The AEB can not recognize cross-
traffic or parked vehicles present-
ing a side-profile.
Limitation of the system
The AEB is an assistant system for a
driver in a certain risky driving condi-
tion and it does not take every
responsibility for all risks from driving
condition.
The AEB monitors the driving situa-
tions through the radar and the cam-
era sensor. For any vehicle activity
occurring outside the sensor range,
the AEB may not function. The driver
should exercise caution in the follow-
ing situations, as the AEB operation
may be limited:
WARNING
The AEB is only a supplemental
system for the driver’s conven-
ience.
The driver still maintains
responsibility to control the
vehicle. Do not solely depend
on the AEB system. Rather,
maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
lower the driving speed.
659
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing vehicles
- The radar or the camera is con-
taminated with foreign substances.
- It heavily rains or snows.
- There is electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
- Something in the path of travel
deflects the radar waves.
- The vehicle in the construction
place or rail road and some metal
objects are on the road.
- The vehicle passes a bumpy,
unpaved, or steep incline road.
- The vehicle drives underground
parking lot or indoor.
- The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicy-
cles)
- The driver’s view is degraded by
driving towards sunlight, reflected
light, or darkness.
- The camera cannot see the full
profile of the vehicle in front.
- The vehicle in front is a special
vehicle, such as a heavily-loaded
truck or a trailer.
The vehicle in front does not turn
ON the rear lights, does not have
rear lights, has asymmetric rear
lights, or has rear lights out of
angle.
- The outside brightness is greatly
changed, such as entering/exiting
the tunnel.
- The vehicle driving is unstable.
- The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited.
- Driving on a curve
The AEB performance decreases
while driving on a curve. The AEB
may not recognize the vehicle in front
even in the same lane. It may unnec-
essarily produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
While driving on a curve, exercise
caution, and, if necessary, depress
the brake pedal.
OQL055053
Driving your vehicle
606
While driving on a curve, the AEB
may recognize the vehicle in front in
the next lane and it produces the
warning message and activates as a
result. Exercise caution, and, if neces-
sary, depress the brake pedal.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to
maintain the driving speed. Always,
take a look around the vehicle for
your safety.
- Driving on a slope
The AEB performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle
in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
- Changing lanes
Even though the vehicle in the next
lane enters into your lane, it may not
be recognized by the AEB, until it
enters the AEB sensing range.
Especially when the vehicle in the
next lane abruptly enters into your
lane, it is more likely not be recog-
nized. Always be attentive to driving
conditions.
OQL055054 OQL055055 OQL055056
661
Driving your vehicle
When the stopped vehicle in front
gets out of the lane, it may not be
recognized by your AEB. Always be
attentive to driving conditions.
- Recognizing the vehicle
When the vehicle in front has heavy
loading extended rearward, or when
the vehicle in front has higher ground
clearance, it may induce a haz-
ardous situation.
Recognizing pedestrians
- The pedestrian is not fully captured
by the camera sensor, or the
pedestrian does not walk in the
upright position.
- The pedestrian moves very fast.
- The pedestrian abruptly appears in
front.
- The pedestrian wears clothes sim-
ilar in color to the background.
- Conditions outside are too bright or
too dark.
- The vehicle drives at night or in the
darkness.
- There is an item similar in shape a
person’s body structure.
- The pedestrian is small.
- The pedestrian has impaired
mobility.
- The pedestrian blends in with their
surroundings.
- Sensor recognition is limited by
rain, snow, fog, etc.
- There is a group of pedestrians.
OQL055057 OQL055058
Driving your vehicle
626
✽✽NOTICE
The system may temporarily cancel
due to the strong electric waves.
• Pay great caution to the vehicle in
front, when it has heavy loading
extended rearward, or when it has
higher ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects pedestri-
an, not carts, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, luggage bags, or strollers.
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
supports the driver come down a
steep hill without depressing the
brake pedal.
WARNING - Testing the
AEB
The AEB does not operate in
certain situations. Thus, never
test-operate the AEB against a
person or an object. It may
cause a severe injury or even
death.
WARNING - AEB and
Towing
Cancel the AEB in the User
Settings on the LCD display,
before towing another vehicle.
While towing, the brake applica-
tion may adversely affect your
vehicle safety.
OQL055117
OQL055116
663
Driving your vehicle
It slows down the vehicle under 8
km/h (5mph) (for automatic
transaxle) and lets the driver concen-
trate on steering the vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
• The DBC defaults to the OFF posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
• Noise or vibration may occur from
the brakes when the DBC is acti-
vated.
• The rear stop light comes on when
DBC is activated.
DBC operation
WARNING
Always turn off the DBC on nor-
mal roads. The DBC might acti-
vate inadvertently from the
standby mode when driving
through speed bumps or mak-
ing sharp curves increasing the
risk of a crash.
Standby
Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under
40 km/h (25 mph). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over
40 km/h (25 mph).
In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 35 km/h
(22 mph) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will
activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deacti-
vate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
•
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automat-
ically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
• The DBC button is pressed again.
• Vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (38 mph).
Activated
Temporarily
deactivated
OFF
Mode Indicator light Description
blinks
illuminated
not
illuminated
illuminated
Driving your vehicle
646
✽✽NOTICE
If the DBC red indicator light illumi-
nates, the system may have overheat-
ed or have malfunctioned. When the
warning light illuminates even
though the DBC system has cooled
off, we recommend that the vehicle
be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible, we recom-
mend you to have the vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• The DBC may not deactivate on
steep inclines even though the
brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• The DBC does not operate when:
- The shift lever is in P (Park).
- The ESC is activated.
Good braking practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
WARNING
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF
position.
Vehicles with the parking brake
not fully engaged are at risk for
moving inadvertently and caus-
ing injury to yourself or others.
665
Driving your vehicle
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and we recommend that you
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
Driving your vehicle
666
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽NOTICE
• During normal cruise control oper-
ation, when the SET switch is acti-
vated or reactivated after applying
the brakes, the cruise control will
energize after approximately 3 sec-
onds. This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
OQLA055025
667
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate. Release the accelerator at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
OQL055026
OQL055027
OQL055028
Driving your vehicle
686
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with the cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an
Automatic Transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 20
km/h (12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 km/h (15
mph).
OQL055029OQL055027
669
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move the
lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30
km/h (20 mph):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when you move the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control opera-
tion, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the pre-
vious page.
OQL055028
OQL055026
Driving your vehicle
706
DRIVE mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transaxle system operat-
ing parameters. Fuel effi-
ciency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the ECO mode is
selected, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn
off the system, press the DRIVE
MODE button again.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
NORMAL
SPORT ECO
OQL055032
■Type A
■Type B
OQL055033
ECO
671
Driving your vehicle
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced even though you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the Active Eco
System is activated to improve fuel
efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
dynamic driving by auto-
matically adjusting the
steering wheel, engine
and transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT indicator
(yellow) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode is activat-
ed, and the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned off and on it will
change to NORMAL mode. To turn
on the SPORT mode press DRIVE
MODE button again.
• If the system is activated:
- While holding vehicle speed, it
maintains the gear and RPM for
some time even though the accel-
erator pedal is not depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽✽ NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
SPORT
Driving your vehicle
726
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses toward the rear sides of the
vehicle and provides and early warn-
ing to the driver.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 10 km/h (6
mph) faster than the other vehi-
cle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rear-
ward, and the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle in the left or
right side, the system will warn
you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unexpect-
ed situations even though the
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane chang-
ing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
OQLE055064
673
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h
(20 mph), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the vehicle is turned off, the system
will remember the last settings upon
restart.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. Vehicle speed is above 32 km/h
(20 mph).
3. Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
OQL055034
Driving your vehicle
746
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and an alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
- The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
✽✽ NOTICE
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
OUM054029
2nd stage
OUM054028
1st stage
675
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
Warning message
• This warning message may appear
when :
- There are foreign substances on
the rear bumper or inside the rear
bumper.
- The vehicle carries a trailer or car-
rier on the rear.
- Driving in rural areas with little traf-
fic or open terrains such as wide
expanse of desert.
- There is heavy snow or rain.
To carry a trailer or carrier on the
rear, turn off the BSD. To turn on the
BSD, remove a trailer or carrier on the
rear.
The light on the switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the message is displayed due
to a foreign substance, remove the
foreign substance on the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approximate-
ly 10 minutes, the system will work
normally.
If the system does not operate nor-
mally after removing the substance or
is not in a situation mentioned above,
we recommend that you take your
vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer
and have the system checked.
OQL055049 OQLE045247
Driving your vehicle
766
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatical-
ly.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off, the
RCTA system will remember the
last settings upon restart. Always
turn the RCTA system off when not
in use.
OQLE055111
OQL055063 OQLA055141
677
Driving your vehicle
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 11 km/h (7
mph) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 0.5 m ~
20 m (1.6 feet ~ 65 feet) based on
the side direction. If the approach-
ing vehicle speed is
4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22
mph) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range can vary based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound and the warn-
ing light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected object is not in your
way, move the vehicle away from
the detected object slowly; and the
warning will cancel once the object
has been safely cleared.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
❈If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by a barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be deteriorated.
OQLE055114
OQLE055130
OQLE055115
Driving your vehicle
786
✽✽ NOTICE
• The system may not work proper-
ly if the bumper has been replaced
or if repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs accord-
ing to the road's width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• If the road is very wide the system
may not detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic interference.
Limitations condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor cover
is dirty with rain, snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or obstructed with foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle racks, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle has signif-
icantly changed such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A substantial amount of metallic
objects such as a construction
area.
- A large vehicle is nearby such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If two vehicles near each other
accelerate together.
- When another vehicle passes by at
a high rate of speed.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When another vehicle drives very
close the back bumper/trunk.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
679
Driving your vehicle
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is very high or low.
- When bike racks, etc. cover the
sensor.
- When reversing from a parking
space with pillars or metal struc-
tures.
- When you are reversing and if the
detected vehicle is simultaneously
reversing.
- If there are small objects like shop-
ping carts and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
- When driving on wet surface.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is very dirty.
- The window is very dirty.
- The windows are tinted very dark.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving your vehicle
806
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 64 km/h (40 mph), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-
sor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and avoid damaging the sensor by
avoiding a strong impacts.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (includ-
ing environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in it's lane at
all times.
WARNING - LDWS Alert
The LDWS is a supplemental
system and only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's posi-
tion on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle.The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dan-
gerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
OQL055030
OQLE055128
OQL055031
681
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button in
the ON position. The indicator illumi-
nates white on the cluster. To cancel
the LDWS, press LDWS button again.
The indicator on the cluster will go
off.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 64 km/h (40 mph),
the warning operates as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave a lane, the lane you
cross will blink (yellow) and LDWS
indicator will blink green on LCD dur-
ing max 3 seconds.
OQLE055102
OQLE055151
OQLE055150
■Left lane departure warning
■Right lane departure warning
Driving your vehicle
826
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates for maximum 3 sec-
onds.
The color of symbol will change
depend on the condition of LDWS
system.
- White color : When you activate the
lane departure warn-
ing system by press-
ing the LDWS button,
system operating con-
ditions are not satis-
fied or the sensor does
not detect the lane line
- Green color : When you activate the
lane departure warn-
ing system by press-
ing the LDWS button,
system operating con-
ditions are satisfied
and the sensor detect
the lane line
- Yellow color : when there is a mal-
function with the lane
departure warning
system.
Warning indicator
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the mes-
sage disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
Conditions that cause the
LDWS not to operate:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lanes.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch then change the lane.
WARNING - LDWS
Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
OQLE045242
OQLE055155
683
Driving your vehicle
Conditions that cause missed
warnings and false warnings:
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, debris, puddles or other envi-
ronmental conditions.
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when
entering/exiting a tunnel.
• The headlights are off at night or in
a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street lights, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle lights reflect
off of water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is obscured
by debris.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The rear view mirror housing has
overheated from exposure to direct
sunlight.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged up by
humidity.
• Objects in the median or along the
side of the road cast shadows over
the lane markings
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the
dust/dirt.
• There are other markings similar to
lane lines.
• There are lane boundaries instead
of markings.
• The vehicle ahead is very close,
obscuring the view of the lane
markings, or the vehicle ahead is
driving over the lane markings.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
poor road conditions.
• The lanes are merging, expanding,
or otherwise overlapping
• Something reflective is placed on
the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• Lanes are marked by more than
two sets of lines.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving your vehicle
846
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
chapter 8. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see
chapter 8 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
685
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for an engine
braking effect.
Driving your vehicle
866
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use the second gear. Accelerate
slowly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an Automatic Transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident. WARNING - Sudden
Vehicle Movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as it
becomes unstuck.
687
Driving your vehicle
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
OQLE055038 OQL055039
Driving your vehicle
886
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
OQLE055040
689
Driving your vehicle
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in chapter 9.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in chapter 8.
Driving your vehicle
906
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
691
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 8. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 8. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 9 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 8 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
Driving your vehicle
926
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, Automatic Transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, shov-
el, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
ket, etc.
693
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized Kia dealer for further
details before towing.
You may require an additional wiring
harness connector to install a trailer
hitch. Please contact an authorized
Kia dealer for more details.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION - Trailer
installation
Follow instructions in this sec-
tion when pulling a trailer.
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
Always check your towing
equipment to confirm correct
equipment size and installation
before use. Using incompatible
or incorrectly installed trailer
equipment can effect the vehi-
cle operation and endanger you
and your passengers.
WARNING - Weight
limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
Driving your vehicle
946
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessory is avail-
able at an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
your state’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instruc-
tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
cle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer
brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system.This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
695
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
vers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
Driving your vehicle
966
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have an automat-
ic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
CAUTION
Always use an approved trailer
wiring harness. Failure to use
an approved trailer wiring har-
ness could result in damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
697
Driving your vehicle
Towing up hill
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temper-
ature gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down.You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibil-
ity of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpected-
ly roll downhill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed downhill, left if headed up
hill).
2. If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the vehicle in P
(Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the engine.
4. Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
Driving your vehicle
986
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
• When towing check transaxle fluid
more frequently.
CAUTION - Air condition
Do not use the A/C while using
your vehicle to tow uphill. Due
to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill
driving.
699
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your vehi-
cle during its first 2,000 km (1,200
miles) in order to allow the engine to
properly break in. Failure to heed
this caution may result in serious
engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized Kia dealer
for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
Item Theta II 2.0 Theta II 2.4
Maximum
trailer weight
Without brake
System 748 kg
(1,650 lbs) 748 kg
(1,650 lbs)
With brake
System 907 kg
(2,000 lbs) 907 kg
(2,000 lbs)
Maximum tongue weight 100 kg
(220 lbs) 100 kg
(220 lbs)
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this sec-
tion.
For North America
Driving your vehicle
1006
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
WARNING - Trailer
Always follow the loading
instructions provided with your
trailer. Improper loading can
effect vehicle operation and
result in an accident.
6101
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OQLA055174/OQLA055173/OQLA055172/OQLA055171/OQLA055170
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
Driving your vehicle
1026
Vehicle capacity weight:
440 kg (970 lbs)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
* 2.0L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 748 kg (1,650 lbs)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)
* 2.4L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 748 kg (1,650 lbs)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
6103
Driving your vehicle
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit -
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1,400 lbs.) and there will be five
68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1,400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
Driving your vehicle
1046
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 136 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 (300 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
499 kg
Luggage weight (1,100 lbs)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 340 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 (750 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 390 kg
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5 (860 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)
ABC
Example 3
6105
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go to
a weigh station and weigh your vehi-
cle.Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equal-
ly on both sides of the centerline.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
✽✽NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling--all of which may result in
a crash.
Driving your vehicle
1066
This chapter will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 7-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 7-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 7-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 7-8
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Low tire pressure position telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
If you have a flat tire (With Tire Mobility Kit). . 7-24
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 7-25
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7
What to do in an emergency
27
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
facia panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OQL066001
OQL066002
■Type A
■Type B
73
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
If the engine stalls while driv-
ing
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If
your vehicle will not start, contact
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
✽✽NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so, wait at least 10 seconds to restart
the vehicle after it stalls. This may
reset the car so it will no longer run
at low power (limp home) condition.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
What to do in an emergency
47
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you oper-
ate the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4. Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1. Check the fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec-
tors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start,
call an authorized Kia dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/
pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
75
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - Push/pull start
to 12 Volt Battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle, be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid.This is poi-
sonous and highly corrosive.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
What to do in an emergency
67
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles
to come in contact.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2). Proceed to connect
one end of the other jumper cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other
end to a solid, stationary, metallic
point (for example, the engine lift-
ing bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near
any part that moves when the
engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it.
When the engine starts, the
vehicle can suddenly surge for-
ward and could cause a colli-
sion with the tow vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative
terminal of the discharged bat-
tery. This can cause the dis-
charged battery to overheat and
crack, releasing battery acid.
77
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (for
Automatic transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air condition-
ing is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cool-
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant
leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized
Kia dealer for assistance.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. If coolant has been lost, care-
fully add coolant to the reservoir to
bring the fluid level in the reservoir
up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is
running, keep hair,
hands and clothing
away from moving
parts such as the fan
and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the
radiator cap when the
engine is hot.This may
result in coolant being
blown out of the open-
ing and cause serious
burns.
What to do in an emergency
87
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the information mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
utes later after driving.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message displays. After
driving, check the tire pressure.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User set-
tings mode” in chapter 4).
✽✽NOTICE
• The tire pressure may change due
to factors such as parking condi-
tion, driving style, and altitude
above sea level.
• Low tire pressure warning may
sound when a tire’s pressure unit is
equal or higher than nearby tires.
This is a normal occurrence, which
is due to the change in tire pressure
along with tire temperature.
• The tire pressure shown on the
dashboard may differ from the
tire pressure measured by tire
pressure gauge.
OQL066006
OQLE065035
OQLE065036
79
What to do in an emergency
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement, alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
What to do in an emergency
107
✽✽NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure
indicator does not illuminate for 3
seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or engine
is running, or if they remain illumi-
nated after coming on for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle
to your nearest authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
and the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may turn on and illuminate after
restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving before you have
the low pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
OQLE065035
711
What to do in an emergency
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the out-
side temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire infla-
tion pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximate-
ly one minute when there is a prob-
lem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an underinfla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then it will illuminate both
the TPMS malfunction and low tire
pressure position telltales e.g. if
Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS
malfunction indicator illuminates, but
if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear
Right tire is under-inflated, the low
tire pressure position telltales may
illuminate together with the TPMS
malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power sup-
ply cables or radios transmitters
such as at police stations, govern-
ment and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installations,
airports, or transmitting towers,
etc. This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
are used or some separate elec-
tronic devices such as notebook
computer, mobile charger, remote
starter or navigation etc., are used
in the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pres-
sure can cause the tires to over-
heat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
What to do in an emergency
127
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will come on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on until
the low pressure tire is repaired and
placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is inflated
again to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will turn off within a
few minutes of driving.
If the indicator has not disappeared
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should be
deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel located in
the spare tire carrier still activates,
the tire pressure monitoring system
may not operate properly. Have the
tire with TPMS serviced or replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Repair
Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pres-
sure tire. The sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
713
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Never use tire sealant if your vehicle
is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pres-
sure sensors.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes grad-
ually and with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
✽✽NOTICE - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) compo-
nents may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
147
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
715
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack and wheel lug nut wrench
are stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Remove the panel indicated in the
illustration.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
• Always move the vehicle complete-
ly off the road and onto the shoul-
der before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on a firm
level ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
OQL065025
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
What to do in an emergency
167
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Use caution when utilizing the sharp
jack handle.
WARNING - Running vehi-
cle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
OQL065031
OQL065032
717
What to do in an emergency
Changing tires (if equipped)
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
ers.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack and spare tire from the vehi-
cle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle in
the correct jack position; never
use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1VQA4022
1VQA4023
What to do in an emergency
187
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place
the jack at the designated loca-
tions under the frame. The jacking
positions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to line up with the jack.
8. Insert the wheel lug nut wrench
into the jack and turn it clockwise,
raising the vehicle until the tire just
clears the ground. This measure-
ment is approximately 30 mm (1
in.).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
OQL065029
OQL065026
OQL065027
OQL065028
719
What to do in an emergency
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can slide over
the other studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-
vents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
207
Position the wrench as shown in the
drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.
Be sure the socket is seated com-
pletely over the nut. Do not stand on
the wrench handle or use an exten-
sion pipe over the wrench handle. Go
around the wheel, tightening every
nut following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are all
tight. Double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized Kia dealer tight-
en the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
11~13 kg·m (79~94 lb·ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations. Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
OQL065030
721
What to do in an emergency
To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut
wrench and spare tire from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store
them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽✽NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
WARNING - Spare tire
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possi-
bly leading to personal injury or
death.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
What to do in an emergency
227
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle com-
ponents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
723
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Move the shift lever to the P posi-
tion on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
• Type A
■Example
• Type B
• Type C
❈The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
What to do in an emergency
247
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia deal-
er as soon as possible.
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit. The Tire
Mobility Kit supports only enough
sealant for one flat tire.
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire may loose air pres-
sure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer to have the tire
replacement.
OQL065008
OQL065007
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
725
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step procedure to temporarily seal
the puncture.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
-30°C (22°F).
What to do in an emergency
267
✽✽NOTICE
Carefully remove any extra sealant
applied on the tire air pressure sen-
sor and wheel after repairing the
tire.
1. Speed restriction label
2. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. On/off switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
CAUTION
Do not use an aftermarket tire
repair kit (including sealant).
The aftermarket sealant may
lead to malfunction of the tire
air pressure sensor.
OJF0650045
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
727
What to do in an emergency
10. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
- Detach the speed restriction label
(1) from the sealant bottle (2), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
1. Shake the sealant bottle enough.
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
OTAM061022
What to do in an emergency
287
2. Screw connection hose (10) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that button (9) on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (3) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
OQLA065010OQLA065039
CAUTION
If sealant is applied when the
valve is incompletely connect-
ed, the sealant may backdraft
and result in valve clogging.
729
What to do in an emergency
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (5) so
that the bottle is upright.
✽✽NOTICE
If a visable foreign object has punc-
tured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7 Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet (3) using
the cable and connectors.
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 9). The infla-
tion pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later. Be careful
not to overinflate the tire and stay
away from the tire when filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
OJF065024 OQL065011
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if
the engine is left running in a
poorly ventilated or unventilat-
ed location (such as inside a
building).
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
What to do in an emergency
307
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about 10
min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and we recommend that
inspect at an authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1. After driving approximately 4 ~ 6
miles (7 ~ 10 km or about 10 min),
stop at a safe location.
2. Connect connection hose (10) of
the compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switch on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compres-
sor, position I. To check the cur-
rent inflation pressure setting,
briefly switch off the compressor.
✽✽NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire reading, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
OQLA065012
731
What to do in an emergency
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button (9) on the
compressor.
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pres-
sure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors at an authorized dealer.
What to do in an emergency
327
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
On FWD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OQL065013
dolly
dolly
WARNING - Side and
curtain Air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignition is
ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
733
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the upper (front) / lower (rear) part
of the cover on the bumper.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OQL065016
OQL065015
OQL065017
OQL065018
■Front
■ Rear
What to do in an emergency
347
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speed.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
OQL065019
OQL065020
■Front
■ Rear
735
What to do in an emergency
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Use only a cable or chain specifical-
ly intended for use in towing vehi-
cles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check if
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
CAUTION
Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body of
your vehicle.
WARNING - Emergency
Towing Precautions
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing hook
and towing cable or chain.The
hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause
serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
We recommend that you con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer
or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
OQL065021
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than 1
km (1.5 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transaxle fluid is leak-
ing, flatbed equipment or a
towing dolly must be used.
736
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 8-24
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
• Recharging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 8-47
• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
• Bulb replacement precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
• Light bulb position (Front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
• Light bulb position (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
• Light bulb position (Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
• Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-83
• Headlamp (High/Low beam) bulb replacement. . . . 8-84
• Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . 8-85
• Position lamp + DRL bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
• Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED type) bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
• Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
• Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
• Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement . . 8-89
• Back-up lamp and Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
• High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . 8-90
• License plate lamp bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
• Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement. . 8-91
• Map lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
• Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
• Room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
• Personal lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
• Glove box lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
• Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 8-103
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
8
83
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OQLE075095/OQLA075109
■■THETA 2.4L - GDI
❈The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■THETA 2.0L T-GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance
48
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory-
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is
provided in your Warranty &
Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
85
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
rings, bracelets, watches, and
necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
Maintenance
68
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
87
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
check the hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
88
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following
conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal
temperature or less than 16 km (10
miles) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
89
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
Maintenance
108
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
811
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have
been submerged in water.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Maintenance
128
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (2.0 T-GDI)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
813
Maintenance
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *2
(Every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*2Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000km (6,500miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
148
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*2Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
815
Maintenance
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 120 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 120 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Maintenance
168
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect drive belts (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (2.0 T-GDI)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
817
Maintenance
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (2.4 GDI)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 168 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 168 months
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 180 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 180 months
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
Maintenance
188
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *2
(Every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑Inspect drive belts (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months)
❑Replace coolant (First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*2Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
819
Maintenance
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
Maintenance
208
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (2.0 T-GDI)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 6,500 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
821
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *5
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *3
(240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
❑Add fuel additive *4 (240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
❑Rotate tire position (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
No check, No service required
❑Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
*1Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspec-
tion is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*3Engine oil (2.0 T-GDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*4If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
228
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
Engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) REvery 6,000 km (3,750 miles) or 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Engine oil and filter (2.0 T-GDI) REvery 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months
Air cleaner filter RMore frequently C, E
Spark plugs RMore frequently B, H
Automatic transmission fluid REvery 96,000 km (60,000 miles) A, C, E, F, G, I
Front brake disc/pads, calipers IMore frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake disc/pads IMore frequently C, D, G, F
Parking brake IMore frequently C, D, G, H
823
Maintenance
Severe Driving Conditions
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal
temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E - Driving in heavy dust condition
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm
ball joint, upper arm ball joint IMore frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots IEvery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter (for evaporator and
blower unit) RMore frequently C, E
Transfer case oil (AWD) REvery 120,000 km (75,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
Rear axle oil (AWD) REvery 120,000 km (75,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
Propeller shaft (AWD) IEvery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Maintenance
248
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe con-
ditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a
lifetime fuel filter that integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance
or replacement is not needed but
depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like
fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, fuel
filter inspection or replace is needed.
The fuel filter be Inspected or
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
825
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system compo-
nents, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Maintenance
268
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this chapter.
✽✽NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir.The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
CAUTION
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid.The use of a non-
specified fluid could result in a
transaxle malfunction and fail-
ure. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants and capacities" in
chapter 9.)
827
Maintenance
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Maintenance
288
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and reinsert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
CAUTION - Replacing
engine oil
Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
OQLE075099
OQLA075110
■THETA 2.4L - GDI
■THETA 2.0L T-GDI
829
Maintenance
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 9.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
OQLE075103
OQLA075111
■THETA 2.4L - GDI
■THETA 2.0L T-GDI
Maintenance
308
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year: at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level • Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool-
ing system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal injury
from escaping hot coolant or
steam.
CAUTION - Radiator cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
831
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the coolant reservoir when
the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to MAX, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, see an authorized Kia deal-
er for a cooling system inspection.
OQLE075007 OQLE075008
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
Maintenance
328
✽✽NOTICE
Make sure the coolant cap is proper-
ly closed after refill of coolant.
Otherwise the engine could be over-
heated while driving.
1. Check if the radiator cap label is
straight In front.
2. Make sure that the tiny protru-
sions inside the coolant cap
should be securely interlocked.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze. This would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
OQL075072
■Engine room front view
OQLE075073
■Engine room rear view
833
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table. Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F)
35 65
-25°C (-13°F)
40 60
-35°C (-31°F)
50 50
-45°C (-49°F)
60 40
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
Maintenance
348
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX (Maximum) level. The level will
fall with accumulated mileage.This is
a normal condition associated with
the wear of brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 9.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
OQL075009 CAUTION - Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
835
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Flammable
fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flamma-
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
OQL075010
Maintenance
368
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44
lbs, 196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 4~5 notch
PARKING BRAKE
OQL075012
837
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1. Pull out the air cleaner cover.
2. Unlock by turning the locking lever
downward.
3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace.
OQL075014
OQL075015
OQL075016
OQL075017
Maintenance
388
4. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK
position.
5. Rise up the cover (2) until the
hooks on the cover are securely
fastened into the latches (3).
6. Check if the cover is firmly
installed.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter
maintenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
a non-genuine part could
damage the air flow sensor.
OQL075057
839
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components. 1. Open the glove box and remove
the stoppers on both sides. 2. With the glove box open, pull the
support strap (1).
OQL075018OQL075019
Maintenance
408
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter cover while pressing the lock
on the left side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OQL075020 OQL075021
841
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Maintenance
428
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm (1) and pull
out the wiper blade assembly.
1LDA5023
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078062
843
Maintenance
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
OHM078063
Maintenance
448
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized Kia dealer to
be recycled.
Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are con-
nected.
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
OQL075022
845
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the bat-
tery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Recharging the battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlamps or interior
lamps were left on while the vehi-
cle was not in use), recharge it by
slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
shock you.
WARNING - Recharging
Battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
Maintenance
468
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See chapter 3)
• Audio (See chapter 5)
847
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
9.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
OQL085002L
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation
(70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separa-
tion and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control.This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
Maintenance
488
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
849
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
9.
Maintenance
508
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING - Mixing tires
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota-
tion.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
851
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
Indicator (A) will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)
of tread left on the tire. Replace the
tire when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
✽✽ NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same which were origi-
nally supplied with the vehicle. If
not, driving performance could be
altered.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
OUM076204L
Maintenance
528
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
OJF085008L
853
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
548
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2016.
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information label
for recommended inflation pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
855
Maintenance
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Maintenance
568
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
857
Maintenance
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68kg
(150 lbs.)
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Maintenance
588
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 2.3
kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
859
Maintenance
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa
(4 psi) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h
(75 mph) when your vehicle is
equipped with snow tires.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are
of belted construction and are select-
ed to complement the ride and han-
dling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Maintenance
608
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
• When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
• If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000 km
(1,900 miles).
861
Maintenance
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see it, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
628
FUSES
❈Left side : Normal , Right side : Blown
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring to the vehicle.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OJF075021
■Blade type
■Cartridge type
■Multi fuse
■BFT
863
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
• When replacing fuse, turn the
ignition “OFF” and turn off
switches of all electrical devices
then remove battery (-) terminal.
• The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
If the switch is located in the “OFF”
position, a caution indicator will be
displayed in the cluster.
OQL075023
WARNING - Electrical Fire
Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed. Failure
to do so can result in a vehicle
fire.
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay, make sure the new
fuse or relay fits tightly into
the clips. Failure to tightly
install the fuse or relay may
cause damage to the wiring
and electric systems.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may not be fas-
tened correctly which may
cause vehicle damage.
Maintenance
648
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the head lamp, turn signal lamp,
stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, tail
lamp, HMSL do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
✽✽NOTICE
If the headlamp, fog lamp, turn sig-
nal lamp, or tail lamp malfunction
even without any problem to the
lamps, have the vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
OQL075024
CAUTION - Fuse Panel
Covers
• Set all switches to ON before
driving.
• If the vehicle is going to be
unused for over 1 month, set
all switches to OFF to prevent
the batteries from draining.
• The contact points of the
switches may wear out with
excessive use. Please refrain
from excessive use of the
switches (except for long-term
parking for over 1 month).
865
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always set the fuse switch to the ON
position before using the vehicle.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly. When the switch is
Off, the caution indicator will be dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehicle.
If the switch is located in the “OFF”
position, a caution indicator will be
displayed in the cluster.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for chang-
ing fuses located in the engine
compartment fuse box. Upon
removal, securely insert reserve
fuse of the same rating.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
OQL075025
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover through the audible click-
ing sound.
If not, electrical failures may
occur from water contact.
OQL075026
Maintenance
668
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reverse these steps to reinstall
the multi fuse.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not disassemble nor assemble the
multi fuse when it is secured with
nuts and bolts. Incorrect or partial
assembly torque may cause a fire.
Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reverse these steps to reinstall
the main fuse.
OQL075027 OQL075028
867
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
The electronic system may not func-
tion correctly even when the engine
compartment and internal fuse
box’s individual fuses are not dis-
connected. In such case the cause of
the problem may be disconnection
of the main fuse (BFT type), which is
located inside the positive battery
terminal (+) cap.
Since the main fuse is designed more
intricately than other parts, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed.
If the battery cap is not securely
closed, moisture may enter the
system and damage the electri-
cal components.
Maintenance
688
Fuse/relay panel description
Driver’s side fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OQLA075037
OQL075029
869
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
MODULE 2 10A Headlamp LH/RH
SMART KEY 1 10A Smart Key Control Module/Immobilizer Module
A/BAG IND 7.5A
Instrument Cluster
[Audio & Manual A/C] Hazard Switch
[Audio & Auto A/C] A/C Control Module
[Navigation] Center Facia Lamp
MODULE 4 10A Console Switch, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, AWD ECM, Crash Pad Switch, BCM, Lane Departure
Warning Control Module
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module
START 7.5A [W/O Smart Key & IMMO.] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), Ignition Switch
[With Smart Key / IMMO.] Transaxle Range Switch, ECM, Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 3 10A Front/Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, ATM Shift Lever ILL., Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, A/V
& Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/C Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector,
Adaptive Front Lighting Module
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
MODULE 9 20A PCB Block (Fuse - ABS 3, VACUUM PUMP 2, ECU 6, AEB, TCU 2, MODULE)
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Maintenance
708
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
HEATED
STEERING 15A BCM
MODULE 6 7.5A Front/Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
MODULE 5 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module
MODULE 1 10A BCM, ATM Shift Lever
P/ WINDOW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch
A/CON 1 7.5A A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Motor, ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay)
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch
SMART KEY 3 10A [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
[With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
STOP LAMP 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
P/ WINDOW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
871
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MEMORY 10A Wireless Charger, Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, BCM, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror
Folding/Unfolding Relay), Electro Chromic Mirror, A/C Control Module, Console Switch
SUN ROOF 1 20A Panorama Sunroof
TAIL GATE
OPEN 10A Tail Gate Relay
INTERIOR LAMP 10A Ignition Key Ill.& Door Warning Switch, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH,
Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Luggage Lamp, Glove Box Lamp
SMART KEY 2 15A Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 8 7.5A Key Solenoid
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear USB Charger
S/HEATER
DRV/PASS 20A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
SUN ROOF 2 20A Panorama Sunroof
P/SEAT (PASS) 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
Maintenance
728
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
POWER OUTLET 20A Front Power Outlet #1 (Front Cigarette Lighter)
S/HEATER
REAR 20A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module
DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay
4WD 20A AWD ECM
MODULE 7 10A Hazard Switch, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, AEB Sensor
AMP 25A AMP
SAFETY
P/ WINDOW 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
HEATED
MIRROR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch
ACC 10A Rear USB Charger, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, PCB Block(Power Outlet Relay), Smart Key Control
Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, Wireless Charger
873
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OQL075030
OQLA075031
Maintenance
748
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MULTI
FUSE
COOLING FAN 2 80A Cooling Fan Motor
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
B+ 1 60A Smart Junction Block (IPS 2 (5CH), IPS 3 (2CH), IPS 4 (2CH), IPS 5 (2CH), IPS 6 (1CH), Fuse -
AMP)
B+ 2 60A Smart Junction Block (IPS 1 (5CH), Fuse - MODULE 7, SMART KEY 2, SMART KET 3, MODULE
8, STOP LAMP)
B+ 3 50A Smart Junction Block (Fuse - SUNROOF 1, SUNROOF 2, S/HEATER DRV/PASS, S/HEATER REAR,
SAFETY P/WINDOW, Power Window Relay)
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
REAR HEATED 40A Rear Heated Relay
IG1 40A [W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PCB Block (PDM (IG1)/PDM (ACC) Relay)
IG2 30A Start Relay, [W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PCB Block (PDM (IG2) Relay)
Engine room compartment fuse panel
875
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
FUSE
B+ 4 50A Smart Junction Block (Fuse - AWD, P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS), TAIL GATE OPEN, DOOR
LOCK, Leak Current Autocut Device Relay)
COOLING FAN 1 50A Cooling Fan 1 Relay
ABS 1 40A ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
POWER
TAIL GATE 40A Power Tail Gate Module
ABS 2 40A ESC Module
COOLING FAN 3 40A Cooling Fan 1 Relay
E-CVVT 1 20A PCM
E-CVVT 2 20A PCM
WIPER FRT 1 30A [W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PDM (IG2) Relay
TCU 1 15A PCM
WIPER FRT 2 10A BCM, PCM
Maintenance
768
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
FUSE
ECU 3 20A PCM
HORN 15A Horn Relay
BATTERY
MANAGEMENT 10A Battery Sensor
SENSOR 2 10A Fuel Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, RCV
Control Solenoid Valve
SENSOR 1 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
ECU 2 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
ECU 4 15A PCM
SENSOR 3 10A E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Canister Close Valve
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
AEB 10A AEB Sensor
MODULE 7.5A Stop Lamp Switch
877
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
FUSE
B/ALARM
HORN 10A E/R Junction Block (B/Alarm Horn Relay)
H/LAMP HI 10A BI-Function H/LP Relay
ABS 3 10A ESC Module
POWER
OUTLET 1 20A Front Power Outlet #2
ECU 6 10A PCM
TCU 2 15A Transaxle Range Switch
B/UP LAMP 10A Rear Bumper Lamp LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror
POWER
OUTLET 2 20A Rear Power Outlet
ECU 1 30A Engine Control Relay
DEICER 15A E/R Junction Block (Deicer Relay)
VACUUM
PUMP 1 20A Vacuum Pump
VACUUM
PUMP 2 15A Vacuum Pump, Cooling Fan Motor, Vacuum Switch
Maintenance
788
Relay Name Type
Cooling Fan 1 Relay MINI
Rear Defogger Relay MICRO
B/A Horn Relay MICRO
Deicer Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan 2 Relay MICRO
Start Relay MICRO
Blower Relay MICRO
Relay
879
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Battery terminal cover)
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OQL075032
OQL075033
Maintenance
808
LIGHT BULBS
Bulb replacement precaution
Please keep extra bulbs on hand
with appropriate wattage ratings in
case of emergencies.
Refer to “Bulb Wattage” in chapter 9.
When changing lamps, first turn off
the engine at a safe place, firmly
apply the parking brake and detach
the battery’s negative (-) terminal.
Use only bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed while the lamp is still
on, the fuse box's electronic sys-
tem may log it as a malfunction.
Therefore, a lamp malfunction
incident may be recorded as a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in
the fuse box.
• It is normal for an operating lamp
to flicker momentarily. This is due
to a stabilization function of the
vehicle’s electronic control device.
If the lamp lights up normally
after momentarily blinking, then
it is functioning as normal.
However, if the lamp continues to
flicker several times or turns off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. Please have the vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer immediately.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light replace-
ment
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION - Headlamp
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean the headlamp lens with
chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
881
Maintenance
If you don’t have the necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlamp assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
If non-genuine parts or substandard
bulbs are used, it may lead to blow-
ing a fuse or other wiring damages.
Do not install extra lamps or LEDs to
the vehicle. If additional lights are
installed, it may lead to lamp mal-
functions and flickering. Additionally,
the fuse box and other writing may
be damaged.
Light bulb position (Front)
OQLA075038
OQLA075039
■Head lamp - Type A
■Head lamp - Type B
OQLA075040
OQLA075041
■Fog lamp - Type A
■Fog lamp - Type B
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Front turn signal lamp
(3) Day time running lamp
/Position lamp (Bulb type)
(4) Day time running lamp
/Position lamp (LED type)
(5) Side marker
(6) Front fog lamp (Bulb type)
(7) Front fog lamp (LED type)
Maintenance
828
Light bulb position (Rear) (1) Tail lamp (BULB type)
(2) Stop and tail lamp (BULB type)
(3) Stop lamp (LED type)
(4) Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
(5) Side marker
(6) Rear turn signal lamp
(7) Back up lamp
(8) License plate lamp
(9) High mounted stop lamp
OQLA075042
OQLA075043
OQLA075044
■Rear combination lamp - Type A
■Rear combination lamp - Type B
■Rear turn signal & Back up lamp
OQL075046
OQLE075084
■License plate lamp
■High mounted stop lamp
883
Maintenance
Light bulb position (Side)
(1) Side repeater lamp (LED type)
Headlamp (HID type) bulb
replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer to
last twice as long or longer than halo-
gen bulbs depending on their fre-
quency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in
the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than typ-
ical use will shorten HID lamps life.
HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lamping components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen bulbs
thus have higher replacement cost.
OQL075047
WARNING - HID
Headlamp (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the HID headlamp
(XENON bulb) due to electric
shock danger. If the light bulb
does not operate, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Maintenance
848
Headlamp (High/Low beam)
bulb replacement
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
5. Install a new bulb-socket assem-
bly in the headlamp assembly by
aligning the tabs on the bulb-sock-
et with the slots in the headlamp
assembly. Push the bulb-socket
into the headlamp assembly and
turn the bulb-socket clockwise.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlamp bulb
OQL075049
OQL075058
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
885
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
replacement
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb-
socket by pressing it in and rotat-
ing it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the
bulb out of the bulb-socket
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-sock-
et into the headlamp assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OQL075050
Maintenance
868
Position lamp + DRL bulb
replacement
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb-
socket by pressing it in and rotat-
ing it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the
bulb out of the bulb-socket
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-sock-
et into the headlamp assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED
type) bulb replacement
If the front fog lamp (Bulb and LED
type) does not operate, we recom-
mend that you checked an author-
ized Kia dealer.
OQL075051
OQL075052
OQL075053
■Type A
■Type B
887
Maintenance
Stop and tail lamp bulb
replacement
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Open the service cover.
3. Loosen the light assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw-
driver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the rear combination
lamp connector.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
OQL075059
OQL075060 OQL075061
Maintenance
888
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
10. Install the rear combination lamp
assembly to the body of the vehi-
cle.
11. Install the service cover.
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replace-
ment
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counter-clockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
OQL075062
OQL075063
889
Maintenance
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
If the stop and tail lamp (LED) does
not operate, we recommend that you
checked an authorized Kia dealer.
Back-up lamp and Rear turn
signal lamp bulb replacement
If the Back-up lamp and Rear turn
signal lamp does not operate, we
recommend that you checked an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQL075069 OQLE075070
Maintenance
908
High mounted stop lamp bulb
replacement
If the high mounted stop lamp (LED)
does not operate, we recommend
that you checked an authorized Kia
dealer.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket
by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
OQL075071
OQL075064
OQL075065
891
Maintenance
Side repeater lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
If the side repeater lamp (LED type)
does not operate, we recommend
that you checked an authorized Kia
dealer.
Map lamp bulb replacement
If the map lamp (bulb and LED type)
does not operate, we recommend
that you checked an authorized Kia
dealer.
Vanity mirror lamp bulb
replacement
OQL075047L
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
OQL075066
OQL075067
Maintenance
928
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
✽✽NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
Room lamp bulb replacement 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
✽✽NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
OQL075068
893
Maintenance
Personal lamp bulb replacement
If the personal lamp (LED) does not
operate, we recommend that you
checked an authorized Kia dealer.
Glove box lamp bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
✽✽NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OQL075054
OQL075055
Maintenance
948
Tailgate room lamp bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
✽✽NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OQL075056
895
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
968
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
Do not apply wax on embossed
unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the
unit.
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wet engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
897
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replace-
ment, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chem-
icals are used in cold weather states
to melt snow and prevent ice accu-
mulation. If these chemicals are not
regularly removed, they will corrode
the vehicle underbody and over time
damage fuel lines, the fuel tank
retention system, the vehicle sus-
pension, the exhaust system, and
even the body frame.
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents contain-
ing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Maintenance
988
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for cor-
rosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scal-
ing or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
899
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
Maintenance
1008
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in prop-
er containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If neces-
sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
8101
Maintenance
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION - Natural leather
seat cover (If equipped)
Natural leather has visible
pores, scars or blood vessels,
etc. Pressure marks or wrinkles
may be made when used.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight
or heat may cause discol-
oration. These things occur due
to the natural characteristics of
cowhides. If the leather is
exposed to rain or gets wet,
remove water with a dry cloth
and dry the leather in the shade
to minimize damage.
Make sure to keep sharp objects
away from the leather as these
can create scratches on the sur-
face. For light-colored leather,
be careful of spots or color
transfer, such as from jeans.
CAUTION - Fabric seat
cover (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats
regularly with a vacuum cleaner
in consideration of fabric mate-
rial characteristics. If they are
heavily soiled with beverage
stains, etc., use a suitable interi-
or cleaner.To prevent damage to
seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with
a large wiping motion and mod-
erate pressure using a soft
sponge or microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or
sharp objects may cause snag-
ging or scratches on the surface
of the seats.
Make sure not to rub such
objects against the surface.
Maintenance
1028
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
8103
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
manual in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Maintenance
1048
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
8105
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
8106
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 9-7
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9
29
DIMENSIONS
Specifications & Consumer information
ENGINE
ITEM Unit : mm (in)
Overall length 4,480 (176.4)
Overall width 1,855 (73.0)
Overall height
Without Roof rack 2WD : 1,635 (64.4)
4WD : 1,645 (64.8)
With Roof rack 2WD : 1,645 (64.8)
4WD : 1,655 (65.2)
Tread
Front
225/60R17 1,613 (63.5)
225/55R18
245/45R19 1,609 (63.3)
Rear
225/60R17 1,625 (64.0)
225/55R18
245/45R19 1,620 (63.8)
Wheelbase 2,670 (105.1)
Items 2.0 T-GDI 2.4 GDI
Displacement [cc (cu. in)] 1,998 (121.93) 2,359 (143.96)
Bore x Stroke [mm (in.)] 86 x 86 (3.39 x 3.39) 88.0 x 97.0 (3.46 x 3.82)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4 In-line, DOHC
93
BULB WATTAGE
Specifications & Consumer information
Light Bulb Wattage (W) Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (Low) 60 9005HL+
Headlamps (Low) - HID type* 34 D3S
Headlamps (High) 60 9005HL+
Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8W
Front position lamps Bulb type 5 W5W
LED type LED LED
Daytime running light Bulb type 28 P28/8W
LED type LED LED
Front fog lamps Bulb type 51 9006
LED type LED LED
Rear
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) Bulb type 28/8 P28/8W
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 8 P28/8W
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) LED type LED LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W
Back-up lamps 21 P21W
High mounted stop lamp* LED LED
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 10 (LED) W10W (LED)
Room lamps 10 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Trunk lamp 10 (LED) FESTOON (LED)
* : if equipped
49
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
*1: Load Index
*2: Speed Symbol
*3: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load
Capacity Speed
capacity
Inflation pressure [kPa (psi)] Wheel lug
nut torque
[Kgf·m
(lbf·ft, N·m)]
Normal load *3Maximum load
LI *1Kg SS *2Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
225/60R17 7.0JX17 99 775 H210 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
11~13
(79~94,
107~127)
225/55R18 7.0JX18 98 750 H210 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
245/45R19 7.5JX19 98 750 H210 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
Compact
spare tire
T135/90D17 4TX17 103 875 M130 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T135/90D17 4TX17 104 900 M130 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
95
Specifications & Consumer information
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make them work irregularly.
✽✽NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon.
Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects
driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please
check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 10.5 kPa (1.5 psi)/km
69
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
LUGGAGE VOLUME
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
Min(V7) : Max Behind Second Seat
Max(V6) : Max Behind Front Seat
Items 2.0 T-GDI 2.4 GDI
Gross vehicle weight kg (lbs.)
2WD 2,165 kg (4,773 lbs) 2,085 kg (4,597 lbs)
4WD 2,210 kg (4,872 lbs) 2,150 kg (4,740 lbs)
ITEM 5 Seater
SAE
V7 From flat luggage board : 798 L
From lower luggage board : 868 L
V6 From flat luggage board : 1,565 L
From lower luggage board : 1,703 L
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant oz. (g) 550±25 R-1234yf
Compressor lubricant oz. (cc) 120±10 PAG30
97
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1*2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
2.0 T-GDI 4.8 L ACEA A5 or above
SAE : C
2.4 GDI 4.8 L
API SM or above
ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 or above
SAE : A
Automatic transmission
fluid
2.0 T-GDI 7.8 L - ATF SP-IV
• The list of transaxle fluid approved by KIA: SK ATF SP-IV,
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV
2.4 GDI 6.7 L - ATF SP-IV
• The list of transaxle fluid approved by KIA: SK ATF SP-IV,
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV
Coolant 2.0 T-GDI 7.2 L Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant for cooling
device)
2.4 GDI 7.8 L
Brake fluid 385 ± 20 cc DOT 3 or DOT 4
89
Specifications & Consumer information
*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Rear differential oil (4WD) 0.58 ± 0.05 L Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W/90 or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (4WD) 2.0 T-GDI 0.35 ± 0.0175 L Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W/90 or equivalent)
2.4 GDI
Fuel 62 L Unleaded gasoline
99
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant.This is especially impor-
tant in dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved roads.
Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas
will prevent dirt and grit from entering
the engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged. Engine oil vis-
cosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel
economy and cold weather operating
(engine start and engine oil flowabili-
ty). Lower viscosity engine oils can
provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance; however, high-
er viscosity engine oils are required
for satisfactory lubrication in hot
weather. Using oils of any viscosity
other than those recommended could
result in engine damage. When
choosing an oil, consider the range of
temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
C *1
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
*1: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil
is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using
the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the
proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
A *2
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
109
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the front
side wall of the engine room.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OQL085001
■Frame number
OQLE085005
■VIN label
OQLE085012
911
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
ENGINE NUMBERTIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
OQL085002L
OJF085005
OUM084007
■Gasoline engine (THETA 2.0L T-GDI)
■Gasoline engine (THETA 2.4L GDI)
Index
I
I
Index
2
I
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system........3-43
Adding equipment to or modifying your air
bag-equipped vehicle................................................3-69
Air bag warning label ................................................3-69
Air bag warning light..................................................3-46
Curtain air bag ............................................................3-61
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ........................3-57
How does the air bag system operate? ......................3-44
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag..3-63
Occupant Detection System (ODS)............................3-50
Side air bag ................................................................3-60
SRS Care ....................................................................3-68
SRS components and functions ..................................3-47
Air cleaner ....................................................................8-37
Filter replacement ......................................................8-37
Air conditioning system ..................................................9-6
All wheel drive (AWD)..................................................6-20
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection ......6-22
For safe all wheel drive operation ..............................6-23
Reducing the risk of a rollover ..................................6-26
Tight corner brake effect ............................................6-21
Appearance care ............................................................8-95
Exterior care................................................................8-95
Interior care ..............................................................8-100
Audio (With Touch Screen) ............................................5-7
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology................................5-40
Features of Your Audio ................................................5-8
Media Mode................................................................5-24
Phone Mode ................................................................5-39
Radio Mode ..............................................................5-19
Setup Mode ................................................................5-55
SiriusXM Radio Mode................................................5-22
Voice Recognition Mode ............................................5-47
Audio System ..................................................................5-2
Antenna ........................................................................5-2
Aux, USB port ..............................................................5-4
How vehicle audio works ............................................5-4
Steering wheel audio controls ......................................5-2
Automatic climate control system ..............................4-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................4-146
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant........................................4-156
Climate control air filter ..........................................4-155
Manual heating and air conditioning........................4-147
System operation ......................................................4-153
Automatic transaxle ......................................................6-13
Automatic transaxle operation....................................6-13
Good driving practices................................................6-19
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ......................6-51
AEB warning message and system control ................6-54
Brake operation ..........................................................6-55
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)..................................6-62
Good braking practices ..............................................6-64
Limitation of the system ............................................6-58
A
I3
Index
Recognizing pedestrians ............................................6-61
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in
front (front radar)......................................................6-56
System malfunction ....................................................6-57
System setting and activation ....................................6-51
Battery............................................................................8-44
For best battery service ..............................................8-44
Recharging the battery................................................8-45
Reset items..................................................................8-46
Before driving..................................................................6-4
Before entering vehicle ................................................6-4
Before starting ..............................................................6-4
Necessary inspections ..................................................6-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ..............................6-72
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ......................................6-73
Limitations condition..................................................6-78
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)................................6-76
Brake fluid ....................................................................8-34
Checking the brake fluid level....................................8-34
Brake system..................................................................6-28
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)....................................6-42
AUTO HOLD..............................................................6-38
Electronic parking brake (EPB)..................................6-31
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................6-44
Good braking practices ..............................................6-50
Hill-start assist control (HAC)....................................6-49
Parking brake – Foot type ..........................................6-30
Power brakes ..............................................................6-28
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................6-48
Warning messages ......................................................6-40
Bulb wattage....................................................................9-3
Child restraint system (CRS) ........................................3-32
Children Always in the Rear ......................................3-32
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................3-36
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................3-33
Clean air ......................................................................4-161
Climate control air filter ................................................8-39
Filter inspection ..........................................................8-39
Cruise Control system ..................................................6-66
To cancel cruise control ..............................................6-68
To decrease the cruising speed ..................................6-68
To increase cruise control set speed ..........................6-67
To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) ............................6-69
To set cruise control speed..........................................6-67
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on ..6-68
To turn cruise control off ............................................6-69
B
C
Index
4
I
Declaration of Conformity ............................................5-64
IC ................................................................................5-64
Defroster ......................................................................4-134
Rear window defroster..............................................4-134
Dimensions ......................................................................9-2
Door locks......................................................................4-22
Child-protector rear door lock ....................................4-25
Impact sensing door unlock system............................4-25
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ............4-23
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ........4-22
Drive mode integrated control system ..........................6-70
Drive mode..................................................................6-70
Economical operation ....................................................6-84
Emergency starting ..........................................................7-5
Jump starting ................................................................7-5
Push-starting ................................................................7-6
Emission control system..............................................8-103
Crankcase emission control system..........................8-103
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system ........8-103
Exhaust emission control system..............................8-104
Engine..............................................................................9-2
Engine compartment ................................................2-6, 8-3
Engine coolant ..............................................................8-30
Changing the coolant ..................................................8-33
Checking the coolant level..........................................8-30
Engine number ..............................................................9-11
Engine oil ......................................................................8-28
Changing the engine oil and filter ..............................8-29
Checking the engine oil level ....................................8-28
ENGINE START/STOP button ......................................6-9
ENGINE START/STOP button position ......................6-9
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button ................6-9
Starting the engine with a smart key ..........................6-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............8-24
Exterior features ..........................................................4-176
Roof rack ..................................................................4-176
Exterior overview ....................................................2-2, 2-3
Folding key ......................................................................4-5
Battery replacement ......................................................4-8
Immobilizer system ......................................................4-9
Key operations ..............................................................4-5
Record your key number ..............................................4-5
Transmitter precautions ................................................4-7
Fuel filler lid ..................................................................4-45
Closing the fuel filler lid ............................................4-45
Opening the fuel filler lid ..........................................4-45
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-2
D
EF
I5
Index
Do not use methanol ....................................................1-4
Fuel Additives ..............................................................1-4
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol ..................1-3
Operation in foreign countries......................................1-5
Fuses ..............................................................................8-62
Engine compartment fuse replacement ......................8-65
Fuse/relay panel description ......................................8-68
Inner panel fuse replacement......................................8-63
Gross vehicle weight........................................................9-6
Hood ..............................................................................4-43
Closing the hood ........................................................4-44
Opening the hood ......................................................4-43
How to use this manual ..................................................1-2
If the engine overheats ....................................................7-7
If the engine will not start ..............................................7-4
If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ..........7-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start ..........7-4
If you have a flat tire ....................................................7-15
Changing tires ............................................................7-17
Jack and tools..............................................................7-15
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................7-16
If you have a flat tire (With Tire Mobility Kit) ............7-24
Checking the tire inflation pressure............................7-30
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit ........................7-26
Distributing the sealant ..............................................7-30
Introduction ................................................................7-24
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit ..........7-25
Technical Data ............................................................7-31
Using the Tire Mobility Kit ........................................7-27
Important safety precautions ..........................................3-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................3-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................3-2
Control your speed ......................................................3-3
Driver distraction ........................................................3-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................3-3
Restrain all children ....................................................3-2
In case of an emergency while driving............................7-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ..............7-3
If the engine stalls while driving ..................................7-3
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................7-3
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-69
Gauges ........................................................................4-71
Instrument Cluster Control ........................................4-70
LCD Display Control..................................................4-70
Transaxle Shift Indicator ............................................4-74
Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-5
Interior features............................................................4-165
G
H
I
Index
6
I
Air ventilation seat....................................................4-167
Bottle holder ............................................................4-165
Cargo security screen................................................4-175
Clothes hanger ..........................................................4-173
Cup holder ................................................................4-165
Floor mat anchor (s)..................................................4-173
Luggage net holder ..................................................4-174
Power outlet ..............................................................4-168
Seat warmer ..............................................................4-166
Sunvisor ....................................................................4-167
USB charger..............................................................4-169
Wireless smart phone charging system ....................4-170
Interior lights ..............................................................4-130
Automatic turn off function......................................4-130
Glove box lamp ........................................................4-132
Liftgate room lamp ..................................................4-132
Map lamp ................................................................4-131
Room lamp................................................................4-130
Vanity mirror lamp....................................................4-132
Interior overview..............................................................2-4
Key positions ..................................................................6-6
Ignition switch position ................................................6-6
Illuminated ignition switch ..........................................6-6
Starting the engine ........................................................6-7
Lane departure warning system (LDWS)......................6-80
Conditions that cause missed warnings and
false warnings ..........................................................6-83
Conditions that cause the LDWS not to operate ........6-82
Warning indicator ......................................................6-82
LCD Display..................................................................4-75
LCD Modes ................................................................4-75
Service Mode ..............................................................4-76
User Settings Mode ....................................................4-78
Liftgate (for manual liftgate) ........................................4-26
Closing the liftgate......................................................4-26
Emergency liftgate safety release ..............................4-27
Opening the liftgate ....................................................4-26
Light bulbs ....................................................................8-80
Back-up lamp and Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement ..............................................................8-89
Bulb replacement precaution ......................................8-80
Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED type) bulb
replacement ..............................................................8-86
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement....................8-85
Glove box lamp bulb replacement..............................8-93
Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement ....................8-83
Headlamp (High/Low beam) bulb replacement..........8-84
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement................8-90
License plate lamp bulb Replacement........................8-90
Light bulb position (Front) ........................................8-81
K
L
I7
Index
Light bulb position (Rear) ..........................................8-82
Light bulb position (Side) ..........................................8-83
Map lamp bulb replacement ......................................8-91
Personal lamp bulb replacement ................................8-93
Position lamp + DRL bulb replacement ....................8-86
Room lamp bulb replacement ....................................8-92
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement......8-91
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement ......8-89
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement ..........................8-87
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement ..........................8-88
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement ........................8-94
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement ........................8-91
Lighting........................................................................4-119
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ................4-125
Battery saver function ..............................................4-119
Check headlight ......................................................4-125
Daytime running light ..............................................4-119
Front fog light ..........................................................4-124
High Beam Assist ....................................................4-122
High beam operation ................................................4-121
Lighting control ........................................................4-119
Turn signals and lane change signals........................4-124
Luggage volume ..............................................................9-6
Maintenance services ......................................................8-4
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................8-5
Owner’s responsibility ..................................................8-4
Manual climate control system....................................4-135
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant........................................4-143
Climate control air filter ..........................................4-143
Heating and air conditioning ....................................4-136
System operation ......................................................4-141
Mirrors ..........................................................................4-58
Inside rearview mirror ................................................4-58
Outside rearview mirror ............................................4-65
Owner maintenance ........................................................8-6
Owner maintenance schedule ......................................8-6
Panoramic sunroof ........................................................4-48
Closing the sunroof ....................................................4-52
Resetting the sunroof ..................................................4-52
Sliding the sunroof ....................................................4-50
Sunroof open warning ................................................4-49
Sunshade ....................................................................4-49
Tilting the sunroof ....................................................4-52
Parking assist system ..................................................4-113
Non-operational conditions of parking assist system..4-115
Operation of the parking assist system ....................4-113
M
O
P
Index
8
I
Self-diagnosis............................................................4-117
Parking brake ................................................................8-36
Checking the parking brake........................................8-36
Power liftgate ................................................................4-28
Closing the liftgate ....................................................4-30
Opening the liftgate ..................................................4-29
Smart Power Liftgate..................................................4-33
Rear parking assist system ..........................................4-109
Non-operational conditions of rear
parking assist system ..............................................4-110
Operation of the rear parking assist system..............4-109
Rear parking assist system precautions ....................4-111
Self-diagnosis............................................................4-112
Rearview camera..........................................................4-118
Recommended lubricants and capacities ........................9-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number ........................9-9
Road warning ..................................................................7-2
Hazard warning flasher ................................................7-2
Scheduled maintenance service ......................................8-8
Seat ..................................................................................3-4
Front seat adjustment - manual ....................................3-7
Front seat adjustment - power ......................................3-9
Headrest (for front seat)..............................................3-11
Rear seat adjustment ..................................................3-14
Seatback pocket ..........................................................3-14
Seat belts........................................................................3-19
Care of seat belts ........................................................3-31
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................3-26
Seat belt precautions ..................................................3-29
Seat belt restraint system ............................................3-19
Smart key ......................................................................4-12
Battery replacement ....................................................4-17
Loss of the smart key..................................................4-16
Record your key number ............................................4-12
Smart key function......................................................4-12
Smart key immobilizer system ..................................4-18
Smart key precautions ................................................4-16
Special driving conditions ............................................6-86
Driving at night ..........................................................6-87
Driving in flooded areas ............................................6-89
Driving in the rain ......................................................6-88
Driving off-road..........................................................6-89
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................6-86
Highway driving ........................................................6-89
Rocking the vehicle ....................................................6-86
Smooth cornering........................................................6-87
Steering wheel ..............................................................4-54
Electronic power steering (EPS) ................................4-54
Heated steering wheel ................................................4-56
Horn ............................................................................4-57
R
S
I9
Index
Tilt and telescopic steering ........................................4-55
Storage compartments ................................................4-162
Center console storage ............................................4-162
Glove box..................................................................4-162
Luggage box..............................................................4-163
Sunglass holder ........................................................4-163
Two types of luggage board use ..............................4-164
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-19
Armed stage ................................................................4-19
Disarmed stage............................................................4-20
Theft-alarm stage ........................................................4-20
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......................7-8
Changing a tire with TPMS........................................7-12
Check tire pressure........................................................7-8
Low tire pressure position telltale ..............................7-10
Low tire pressure telltale ............................................7-10
Tire specification and pressure label ............................9-11
Tires and wheels ............................................................8-47
Tires and wheels ..............................................................9-4
All season tires............................................................8-59
Checking tire inflation pressure..................................8-48
Low aspect ratio tire ..................................................8-60
Radial-ply tires............................................................8-59
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures................8-47
Snow tires....................................................................8-59
Summer tires ..............................................................8-59
Tire care ......................................................................8-47
Tire maintenance ........................................................8-52
Tire pressure................................................................8-48
Tire replacement ........................................................8-51
Tire rotation ................................................................8-49
Tire sidewall labeling..................................................8-52
Tire traction ................................................................8-52
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................8-50
Wheel replacement ....................................................8-52
Towing ..........................................................................7-32
Emergency towing ......................................................7-34
Removable towing hook ............................................7-33
Towing service ............................................................7-32
Trailer Towing................................................................6-93
Driving with a trailer ................................................6-95
Hitches ......................................................................6-94
If you do decide to pull a trailer ................................6-99
Maintenance when trailer towing ............................6-98
Safety chains ..............................................................6-94
Trailer brakes ............................................................6-94
Trip modes (Trip computer) ..........................................4-84
A/V Mode ..................................................................4-88
Digital speedometer ....................................................4-87
Fuel Economy ............................................................4-84
LDWS Mode ..............................................................4-88
One time driving information mode ..........................4-87
Trip A/B ......................................................................4-86
T
Index
10
I
Trip Modes..................................................................4-84
Turn By Turn Mode ..................................................4-88
Warning Messages ......................................................4-89
Vehicle break-in process..................................................1-6
Vehicle certification label ..............................................9-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ............1-7
Vehicle handling instructions ..........................................1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ............................9-10
Vehicle load limit ........................................................6-101
Certification label......................................................6-105
Tire and loading information label ..........................6-101
Vehicle weight ............................................................6-106
Warning and indicator lights..........................................4-97
Indicator Lights ........................................................4-104
Warning lights ............................................................4-97
Washer fluid ..................................................................8-35
Checking the washer fluid level..................................8-35
Welcome system ..........................................................4-133
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function......................4-133
Interior light ............................................................4-133
Pocket lamp ..............................................................4-133
Windows ........................................................................4-38
Power windows ..........................................................4-39
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-157
Automatic climate control system ............................4-158
Defogging logic ........................................................4-159
Manual climate control system ................................4-157
Winter driving................................................................6-90
Carry emergency equipment ......................................6-92
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary................6-91
Check battery and cables ............................................6-91
Check spark plugs and ignition system ......................6-91
Don’t let your parking brake freeze............................6-92
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath ..........6-92
Snowy or icy conditions ............................................6-90
To keep locks from freezing ......................................6-91
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system..6-91
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ..................6-91
Wiper blades ..................................................................8-41
Blade inspection..........................................................8-41
Blade replacement ......................................................8-41
Wipers and washers ....................................................4-126
Front windshield washers ........................................4-127
Rear window wiper and washer switch ....................4-128
Windshield wipers ..................................................4-126
V
W
